null  null
EN
PROGRAMMING
MANUAL
Technical Manual for programming Vedo 2.6.x control panels
Passion.Technology.Design.
< BACK
Table of contents
1. Introduction to Safe Manager 2.6.0 software.......................... 5
1.1 INSTALLING SAFE MANAGER 2.6.........................................................................5
1.1.1 System requirements.......................................................................5
1.1.2 Installation procedure......................................................................5
1.2 FIRST START-UP OF THE SOFTWARE..................................................................5
1.3 CHANGING THE SOFTWARE LANGUAGE...........................................................5
1.4 ESTABLISHING A CONNECTION BETWEEN A PC AND VEDO SERIES CONTROL
PANELS....................................................................................................................5
1.4.1 Set communication via USB............................................................5
1.4.2 Set communication via TCP/IP........................................................6
1.5 VIEWING THE INSTALLED FIRMWARE VERSION OF THE CONTROL PANEL.6
1.6 CREATING A NEW SYSTEM....................................................................................6
2. Standard procedures................................................................ 7
2.1 SAVING THE CONFIGURATION FOR THE SYSTEM IN USE...............................7
2.2 OPENING THE CONFIGURATION FOR A PREVIOUSLY SAVED SYSTEM.........7
2.3 PRINT PROJECT FUNCTION..................................................................................7
2.4 EXPORTING A SYSTEM CONFIGURATION...........................................................7
2.5 IMPORTING A SYSTEM CONFIGURATION............................................................8
2.6 SENDING / RECEIVING CONTROL PANEL PARAMETERS.................................8
2.7 SENDING AN AUDIO PACKAGE.............................................................................8
2.8 RECEIVING THE EVENTS LOG..............................................................................9
2.9 RESET ACCESS CODE............................................................................................9
2.10 INSTALLER AUTHORISATION..............................................................................9
3. System configuration............................................................... 10
3.1 CONTROL DEVICES................................................................................................10
3.1.1 Keypads............................................................................................10
Status / ID / description.......................................................................................10
Checked areas.....................................................................................................10
Area.......................................................................................................................11
Show ....................................................................................................................11
Display tamper.....................................................................................................11
Display technical alarms.....................................................................................11
Options ................................................................................................................11
System status display time................................................................................11
Tamper alarm cycles...........................................................................................11
Technical alarms cycles (bus/voltage levels)...................................................11
Proximity card cycle actions (Art. VEDOLCDPRO only)..................................11
Partial keys...........................................................................................................12
Function keys......................................................................................................12
Buzzer...................................................................................................................12
Send message options.......................................................................................12
3.1.2 Safetouch..........................................................................................13
Status / ID / description.......................................................................................13
Checked areas.....................................................................................................13
Area.......................................................................................................................13
Display tamper.....................................................................................................13
Display technical alarms.....................................................................................13
Options ................................................................................................................14
System status display time................................................................................14
Tamper alarm cycles...........................................................................................14
Technical alarms cycles (bus/voltage levels)...................................................14
Px key functions..................................................................................................14
Fx key functions..................................................................................................14
Buzzer...................................................................................................................14
Send message options.......................................................................................14
Terminals..............................................................................................................14
Network parameters............................................................................................14
VIP options...........................................................................................................14
3.1.3 Touch devices...................................................................................15
Status / ID / description.......................................................................................15
Checked areas.....................................................................................................15
Area.......................................................................................................................15
Display tamper.....................................................................................................15
Display technical alarms.....................................................................................15
Options ................................................................................................................16
System status display time................................................................................16
Tamper alarm cycles...........................................................................................16
Technical alarms cycles (bus/voltage levels)...................................................16
Px key functions..................................................................................................16
Fx key functions..................................................................................................16
Buzzer...................................................................................................................16
Send message options.......................................................................................16
Network parameters............................................................................................16
VIP options...........................................................................................................16
3.1.4 RFID readers.....................................................................................17
Status / ID / description.......................................................................................17
Checked areas.....................................................................................................17
Area.......................................................................................................................17
Display tamper.....................................................................................................17
Display technical alarms.....................................................................................17
LED ON time on proximity key...........................................................................17
Tamper alarm cycles...........................................................................................17
Technical alarms cycles (bus/voltage levels)...................................................17
Cycle actions.......................................................................................................18
Buzzer...................................................................................................................18
Forced activation.................................................................................................18
Send message options.......................................................................................18
Meaning of reader LEDs in normal conditions.................................................18
Meaning of reader LEDs during presentation of the key.................................18
2
3.1.5 Phone App.........................................................................................19
System requirements:.........................................................................................19
How to proceed....................................................................................................19
Status / ID / description.......................................................................................20
Checked areas.....................................................................................................20
Area.......................................................................................................................20
Display tamper.....................................................................................................20
Options.................................................................................................................20
Tamper alarm cycles...........................................................................................20
Fx key functions..................................................................................................20
VIP options...........................................................................................................20
Send message options.......................................................................................20
3.1.6 Bridge................................................................................................21
Status / ID / description.......................................................................................21
Checked areas.....................................................................................................21
Area.......................................................................................................................21
Display tamper.....................................................................................................21
Display technical alarms.....................................................................................21
Options.................................................................................................................21
Tamper alarm cycles...........................................................................................21
Technical alarms cycles (bus/voltage levels)...................................................21
Send message options.......................................................................................21
3.2 EXPANSIONS ON BUS............................................................................................22
3.2.1 8 input/output expansions...............................................................22
Status / ID / description.......................................................................................22
Area.......................................................................................................................22
Display tamper.....................................................................................................22
Display technical alarms.....................................................................................22
Terminals..............................................................................................................22
Tamper alarm cycles...........................................................................................22
Technical alarms cycles (bus/voltage levels)...................................................22
Send message options.......................................................................................22
3.2.2 Power supply units..........................................................................23
Status / ID / description.......................................................................................23
Area.......................................................................................................................23
Display tamper.....................................................................................................23
Display technical alarms.....................................................................................23
Options.................................................................................................................23
Tamper alarm cycles...........................................................................................23
Send message options.......................................................................................23
Reading analogue values...................................................................................23
3.2.3 Isolators............................................................................................24
Status / ID / description.......................................................................................24
Area.......................................................................................................................24
Display tamper.....................................................................................................24
Display technical alarms.....................................................................................24
Options.................................................................................................................24
Tamper alarm cycles...........................................................................................24
Technical alarms cycles (bus/voltage levels)...................................................24
Send message options.......................................................................................24
Reading analogue values...................................................................................24
3.3 RADIO EXPANSIONS...............................................................................................25
Status / ID / description.......................................................................................25
Area.......................................................................................................................25
Display tamper.....................................................................................................25
Display technical alarms.....................................................................................25
Tamper alarm cycles...........................................................................................25
Technical alarms cycles (bus/voltage levels)...................................................25
Send message options.......................................................................................25
3.3.1 Radio outputs /sirens.......................................................................26
Radio output acquisition....................................................................................26
Deleting a radio output.......................................................................................26
Status / ID / description.......................................................................................26
Physical Id............................................................................................................26
Source expansion................................................................................................26
Area.......................................................................................................................27
Display system status.........................................................................................27
Display tamper.....................................................................................................27
Radio output properties......................................................................................27
Other options.......................................................................................................27
RSSI (signal level indicator 0-100).....................................................................27
Siren options........................................................................................................27
Event 1 / 2 / 3 / 4...................................................................................................27
Events association (AND/OR)............................................................................27
Sabotage cycles..................................................................................................27
Malfunction alarm cycles....................................................................................27
Behaviour.............................................................................................................27
Send message options.......................................................................................27
3.3.2 Radio controls..................................................................................28
ID...........................................................................................................................28
Description...........................................................................................................28
Source expansion................................................................................................28
User.......................................................................................................................28
Checked areas.....................................................................................................28
Area.......................................................................................................................28
Radio control properties.....................................................................................28
RSSI (signal level indicator 0-100).....................................................................28
Function keys......................................................................................................28
Fault cycles..........................................................................................................28
Forced activation.................................................................................................29
Instant activation.................................................................................................29
Send message options.......................................................................................29
3.3.3 Radio zones......................................................................................30
Radio sensor acquisition....................................................................................30
Duplicate the values of the current zone..........................................................31
Status / ID / description.......................................................................................31
Physical Id............................................................................................................31
Source expansion................................................................................................31
Radio zone properties.........................................................................................31
RSSI (signal level indicator 0-100).....................................................................31
Options.................................................................................................................31
Fault cycles..........................................................................................................31
PIR (options apply to PIR sensors only)...........................................................31
< BACK
< BACK
Reed (options apply to Reed sensors only)......................................................31
Smoke...................................................................................................................31
Zone......................................................................................................................32
3.4 WIRED ZONES..........................................................................................................33
Duplicate the values of the current zone..........................................................33
Status ...................................................................................................................34
Expansion type....................................................................................................34
Origin....................................................................................................................34
Zone ID.................................................................................................................34
Zone description / Double zone.........................................................................34
Double Id..............................................................................................................34
Terminal................................................................................................................34
Double..................................................................................................................34
Balancing.............................................................................................................34
Fault / tampering / shortcircuit cycles...............................................................34
Setpoints..............................................................................................................34
Zone / Double.......................................................................................................34
3.5 GROUPS IN AND......................................................................................................36
ID...........................................................................................................................36
Description...........................................................................................................36
Time window........................................................................................................36
ID...........................................................................................................................36
Description...........................................................................................................36
Zone Type.............................................................................................................36
Expansion type....................................................................................................36
Double..................................................................................................................36
3.6 AREAS.......................................................................................................................37
ID...........................................................................................................................37
Description...........................................................................................................37
Report pre-alert....................................................................................................37
Deactivation with alarm memory.......................................................................37
Input 1 time (mm:ss)...........................................................................................37
Input 2 time (mm:ss)...........................................................................................37
Output time (mm:ss)...........................................................................................37
Last output time (mm:ss)....................................................................................37
Not activated alert (minutes)..............................................................................37
Pre-alert time - activation (minutes)..................................................................37
Patrol time (minutes)...........................................................................................37
Burglar alarm delay (seconds)...........................................................................38
Activation delay after alarm (minutes)..............................................................38
Enable activation timer.......................................................................................38
Enable deactivation timer...................................................................................38
Auto-reset alarms................................................................................................38
Area code.............................................................................................................38
Areas in AND........................................................................................................38
Instant activation of areas in AND.....................................................................38
Forced activation of areas in AND.....................................................................38
3.7 OUTPUTS..................................................................................................................39
Status....................................................................................................................39
Expansion ID........................................................................................................39
Description...........................................................................................................39
Expansion Type...................................................................................................40
Output Id...............................................................................................................40
Terminal................................................................................................................40
Event 1 / 2 / 3 / 4...................................................................................................40
Events association (AND/OR)............................................................................40
Behaviour.............................................................................................................40
Send message options.......................................................................................40
3.8 EVENTS GROUP......................................................................................................41
ID...........................................................................................................................41
Description...........................................................................................................41
Event 1 / 2 / 3 / 4 /... / 16.......................................................................................41
3.9 SCENARIOS..............................................................................................................42
ID...........................................................................................................................42
Description...........................................................................................................42
Area.......................................................................................................................42
Action...................................................................................................................42
3.10 CODES....................................................................................................................43
Modifying user/installer codes...........................................................................43
Deleting user/installer codes..............................................................................43
3.10.1 Users...............................................................................................44
ID...........................................................................................................................44
User Name............................................................................................................44
User type..............................................................................................................44
Area.......................................................................................................................45
Enable...................................................................................................................45
Reset code...........................................................................................................45
Delete code..........................................................................................................45
Keys and radio controls association window...................................................45
Associated timer..................................................................................................45
Number of operations.........................................................................................45
Keypad/reader authorisations............................................................................45
Robbery code.......................................................................................................45
Disable activation with areas in alarm...............................................................45
Send message options.......................................................................................45
3.10.2 Installers..........................................................................................46
ID...........................................................................................................................46
Description...........................................................................................................46
Installer type........................................................................................................46
Reset code...........................................................................................................46
Delete code..........................................................................................................46
Keys and radio controls association window...................................................46
Send message options.......................................................................................46
3.10.3 Access levels..................................................................................47
Enabling a level 3 user (via keypad)..................................................................47
How to logout from different control devices...................................................48
3.10.4 Proximity keys................................................................................49
Acquiring an RFID digital key code...................................................................49
Assigning a key to a user...................................................................................49
Deleting an RFID digital key code......................................................................49
ID...........................................................................................................................49
Description...........................................................................................................49
3
User.......................................................................................................................49
Colour...................................................................................................................49
Acquire.................................................................................................................49
Delete....................................................................................................................49
3.11 COMMUNICATION INTERFACES.........................................................................50
3.11.1 IP Options........................................................................................50
Options.................................................................................................................50
Network Time Protocol Options.........................................................................51
Dynamic DNS.......................................................................................................51
Services configuration........................................................................................51
Ports for access to web pages...........................................................................51
Ports for remote management via Safe Manager.............................................51
SMTP options.......................................................................................................51
3.11.2 GSM Options...................................................................................52
Telephone options...............................................................................................52
SMS options.........................................................................................................52
Communicator SIM options................................................................................52
Checks on module...............................................................................................52
Load Default Settings (icon in the form of a cellphone)..................................52
Email Options......................................................................................................53
MMS options........................................................................................................53
3.11.3 Pal/IP video module........................................................................54
Status / ID / description.......................................................................................55
Area.......................................................................................................................55
Display technical alarms areas..........................................................................55
Network parameters............................................................................................55
New module IP programming pop-up................................................................55
VIP options...........................................................................................................55
Technical alarms cycles (bus/voltage levels)...................................................56
Cameras installed................................................................................................56
Cameras installed (IP).........................................................................................56
Images..................................................................................................................56
Send message options.......................................................................................56
Configuring a PAL/IP module.............................................................................56
3.11.4 Cloud Options.................................................................................57
Connection...........................................................................................................57
Cloud Recording..................................................................................................57
3.12 COMMUNICATOR...................................................................................................58
3.12.1 Telephone Options.........................................................................58
Answer..................................................................................................................58
Call........................................................................................................................58
PSTN settings......................................................................................................58
Telephone signaller parameters.........................................................................58
Priority management...........................................................................................59
3.12.2 Phone Book....................................................................................59
ID...........................................................................................................................59
Description...........................................................................................................59
Email.....................................................................................................................59
Stop calls..............................................................................................................60
Receiving SMS / Email / MMS.............................................................................60
3.12.3 Digital communicator contacts list...............................................60
ID...........................................................................................................................60
Description...........................................................................................................60
Number to call......................................................................................................60
Protocol................................................................................................................60
Customer code....................................................................................................60
Send Area code....................................................................................................60
Enable periodic test............................................................................................60
Periodic test start date........................................................................................60
Test period............................................................................................................60
Call attempts........................................................................................................60
Hands-free after report........................................................................................60
3.12.4 Generic events................................................................................61
Text To Speech Configuration............................................................................61
ID...........................................................................................................................61
Description...........................................................................................................61
Telephone.............................................................................................................61
Activation voice message...................................................................................61
Reset voice message..........................................................................................61
Send activation SMS...........................................................................................61
Send reset SMS...................................................................................................61
Send activation email..........................................................................................61
Send reset email..................................................................................................61
Options.................................................................................................................62
Other options (SMS and email)..........................................................................62
Event.....................................................................................................................62
Auto-composition................................................................................................63
3.12.5 Detailed events...............................................................................64
ID...........................................................................................................................64
Description...........................................................................................................64
App........................................................................................................................64
Areas.....................................................................................................................64
Enable MMS.........................................................................................................64
Tab for selecting details of events to signal.....................................................64
Telephone contacts list phones.........................................................................64
Digital communicator telephones......................................................................64
3.12.6 Contact-ID Map...............................................................................65
ID...........................................................................................................................65
Description...........................................................................................................65
Event code...........................................................................................................65
Qualifier................................................................................................................65
Select Zone/User.................................................................................................65
3.12.7 Free voice messages.....................................................................66
Run Text To Speech on selected messages.....................................................66
Text To Speech Configuration............................................................................66
Delete selected audio messages.......................................................................66
Enable...................................................................................................................66
ID...........................................................................................................................66
Description...........................................................................................................66
Text to speech......................................................................................................66
Check message...................................................................................................66
Voice configuration.............................................................................................66
< BACK
< BACK
Enter a free voice message................................................................................66
Deleting one or more free voice messages......................................................66
3.12.8 SMS..................................................................................................67
ID...........................................................................................................................67
Description...........................................................................................................67
Text........................................................................................................................67
3.12.9 Email................................................................................................67
ID...........................................................................................................................67
Description...........................................................................................................67
Text........................................................................................................................67
3.12.10 Service voice messages..............................................................67
Configure the System Address message..........................................................67
3.13 TIMETABLE PROGRAMMER................................................................................68
3.13.1 Timer................................................................................................68
ID...........................................................................................................................68
Description...........................................................................................................68
ID...........................................................................................................................68
Enable...................................................................................................................68
Description (timer type)......................................................................................68
ONx.......................................................................................................................68
OFFx.....................................................................................................................68
3.13.2 Activations......................................................................................69
ID...........................................................................................................................69
Description...........................................................................................................69
Enabled.................................................................................................................69
Forced...................................................................................................................69
Control..................................................................................................................69
Area.......................................................................................................................69
ON1.......................................................................................................................69
Action 1................................................................................................................69
CODE TYPE..........................................................................................................82
5.3.14 Installers..........................................................................................82
CODE TYPE..........................................................................................................82
5.3.15 IP Options ......................................................................................83
5.3.16 GSM settings..................................................................................83
5.3.17 Telephone Options.........................................................................83
5.3.18 Phone Book / Email........................................................................83
5.3.19 Digital communicator contacts list...............................................83
5.3.20 Generic events................................................................................83
5.3.21 Detailed events...............................................................................83
DETAILED EVENTS FLAGS.................................................................................83
5.3.22 Service voice messages................................................................85
5.3.23 Timer Types....................................................................................85
TIMER TYPE SCHEDULES..................................................................................85
5.3.24 Timer Model ...................................................................................85
5.3.25 System Parameters........................................................................85
5.3.26 Events to be saved.........................................................................85
5.4 CONFIGURATIONS NECESSARY TO GUARANTEE INCERT CERTIFICATION.86
5.4.1 Code type..........................................................................................86
5.4.2 System Parameters .........................................................................86
3.14 SYSTEM PARAMETERS........................................................................................70
Presence of expansions.....................................................................................70
Options.................................................................................................................70
Control devices....................................................................................................71
System times.......................................................................................................71
Fault cycles..........................................................................................................72
Alarm cycles........................................................................................................72
Date and time.......................................................................................................72
Firmware version.................................................................................................72
Installer authorisation.........................................................................................72
Manufacturer authorisation................................................................................72
Restore factory default.......................................................................................72
3.15 EVENTS LOG..........................................................................................................73
3.15.1 Events Log......................................................................................73
CSV.......................................................................................................................73
Re-analyse current events log...........................................................................73
Filter events.........................................................................................................73
KEY TO COLOURS..............................................................................................73
CONTENTS...........................................................................................................73
event.....................................................................................................................73
Mask......................................................................................................................73
Date.......................................................................................................................73
Agent....................................................................................................................73
3.15.2 Events to be saved.........................................................................74
ID...........................................................................................................................74
Description...........................................................................................................74
Set.........................................................................................................................74
Reset.....................................................................................................................74
4. System Verification................................................................... 75
4.1 CONTROL PANEL CHECK (REAL TIME)...............................................................75
4.1.1 Launch control panel check function (Real Time)........................76
4.1.2 Control panel check (Real Time) in alarm condition, activation,
command.............................................................................................76
4.2 CONFORMANCE VERIFICATION (EN50131 GRADE 2 / EN50131 GRADE 2 +
INCERT)....................................................................................................................77
4.2 1 Run the function Conformance verification (EN50131 grade 2 /
EN50131 grade 2 + incert)..................................................................77
5. Appendix.................................................................................... 78
5.1 PORT FORWARDING FOR REMOTE CONNECTION............................................78
5.2 COMELIT DNS REGISTRATION PROCEDURE FOR VEDOIP EXPANSION.......79
5.3 CONFIGURATIONS NECESSARY TO GUARANTEE GRADE 2 CERTIFICATION
ACCORDING TO EN50131-1..................................................................................81
5.3.1 Keypads............................................................................................81
5.3.2 App.....................................................................................................81
5.3.3 Input/output expansions (8I8O)......................................................81
5.3.4 Power supply stations.....................................................................81
5.3.5 Isolators............................................................................................81
5.3.6 Radio expansion...............................................................................81
5.3.7 Radio outputs...................................................................................81
RADIO OUTPUT EVENTS....................................................................................81
RADIO OUTPUT CONFIGURATION.....................................................................81
5.3.8 Radio controls..................................................................................81
5.3.9 Radio zones......................................................................................82
RADIO SUBZONE PARAMETERS.......................................................................82
5.3.10 Wired zones....................................................................................82
SUBZONE PARAMETERS....................................................................................82
5.3.11 Areas................................................................................................82
5.3.12 Wired outputs.................................................................................82
WIRED OUTPUT EVENTS....................................................................................82
WIRED OUTPUT CONFIGURATION....................................................................82
5.3.13 User.................................................................................................82
4
< BACK
< BACK
1. Introduction to Safe Manager 2.6.0 software
Options
1.1 INSTALLING SAFE MANAGER 2.6
Options
1.1.1 System requirements
√√ PC with Microsoft Windows (Vista, 7, 8, 8.1 or 10) and a free
USB port.
√√ NET 4.6.1 Framework (downloadable from Microsoft website).
√√ Comelit Safe Manager configuration software (downloadable
from pro.comelitgroup.com).
√√ A-A USB cable.
Communications
Italiano
Language:
Italiano
Español
Isolated peripheral: Français
English
Events log
Nederlands
Alarm/ Sabotage:
Colour
Fault / Test:
Generic:
First Zone:
1.1.2 Installation procedure
√√ Make sure that the Vedo Series control panel is NOT
connected to the PC.
1. Run Setup.exe (from the CD or from the file downloaded from
pro.comelitgroup.com).
2. Follow the on-screen instructions.
»» During Safe Manager installation, the USB driver installation
request will appear automatically.
Windows Security
4. Click Ok to confirm the changes you have made.
Ok that the
Cancel
5. The software will confirm
changes have been saved via the
following message.
Safe Manager
Italiano
Language:
Italiano
Español
Isolated
peripheral:
The new settings will take effectFrançais
after the programme has been re-started.
English
Events log
Nederlands
Colour
Events memory:
Install this device software?
Zone 1:
Generic:
Comelit Vedo USB port driver Ports (COM...
Author: COMELIT GROUP SPA
OK
6. Restart Safe Manager to complete the language change procedure.
Always trust software from “COMELIT GROUP SPA”.
Setup
Don't Install
You should only install driver software from publishers you trust.
How can I decide which device software is safe to install?
3. Click the Install option to install the driver software.
CAUTION! With control panel card PCBVEDO200 and firmware
version up to 2.4.0.
The first time the control panel is switched on with the
VEDOVOICE card connected, the audio must be regenerated
and re-sent to the control panel via Safe Manager (see "2.7
Sending an audio package" on page 8).
1.2 FIRST START-UP OF THE SOFTWARE
The program starts if you click on the Safe Manager icon, the position of
which depends on the operating system used. If using Windows 7, proceed
as follows:
1. Select Start.
2. Select the folder All programs.
3. Select the folder Safe Manager.
4. Click the Safe Manager icon.
5. The first time it is started, you will be asked to select the software
language.
Safe Manager
1.4 ESTABLISHING A CONNECTION BETWEEN A PC
AND VEDO SERIES CONTROL PANELS
To programme the control panel with Safe Manager it is necessary to
establish a connection between the control panel and the PC.
The Vedo system offers 2 possibilities:
• via USB
• via TCP/IP protocol (if the IP communication card expansion is
installed Art. VEDOIP)
1.4.1 Set communication via USB
√√ Before carrying out the following procedure, make sure that
the USB drivers for Vedo series control panels have been
installed correctly (see “1.1.2 Installation procedure” on page
5).
1. Connect the control panel to the PC using an A-A type USB
cable.
2. Click the Tools menu.
3. Click the Options menu.
Safe Manager
Project
View
Tools
Windows
Help
Options
Updating firmware...
Español
Italiano
Français
4. Click the Communications
tab.
Control
unit check (Real Time)
5. Select Serial port underScan
theSystem...
option Communication type.
6. Use the drop-down menu to select the COM port to which the
Send audio
control panel is connected.
Receive events log
Options
English
Nederlands
Options
Communications
Communication type
Serial port
Serial port
TCP/IP
COM 6
Passion.Technology. Design.
1.3 CHANGING THE SOFTWARE LANGUAGE
1. Click the Tools menu.
2. Click the Options menu.
Safe Manager
Project
View
Tools
OK
Windows
Help
Options
Updating firmware...
3. Select the desired language
from
the(Real
drop-down
menu.
Control unit
check
Time)
5
Scan System...
Send audio
Receive events log
Cancel
7. Click Ok to confirm the changes you have made.
8. Make sure the USB connection status icon (in the bottom righthand corner of the main window) has changed from
to
.
< BACK
< BACK
1.4.2 Set communication via TCP/IP
√√ Before carrying out the following procedure, make sure that
the PC used and the Vedo series control panel are both on
the same network.
1. Click the Tools menu.
2. Click the Options menu.
Safe Manager
Project
View
Tools
Windows
Help
Options
Central unit firmware version
Login
Firmware version
Read
Request code
Enter access code
******
Installer authorisation
Login
Cancel
»» The box will display the control panel data.
Central unit firmware version
Central unit firmware version
Firmware version
Read
Updating firmware...
HARDWARE_ID:MuTy - (Vedo68)
HARDWARE_BOOT_VER: 0x2
VERSION_CODE: 0x0
COMMIT#/stable/[email protected]
Firmware version
3. Click the Communications tab.
Control unit check (Real Time)
4. Select TCP/IP under the option Communication type.
HARDWARE_ID:MuTy - (Vedo68)
Read
System...
5. Enter the IP address Scan
of the
IP card expansion module in the
HARDWARE_BOOT_VER: 0x2
Sendfield.
audio
Host name or IP address
VERSION_CODE: 0x0
6. Insert the number of the
communication
port in the Port field
Receive
events log
COMMIT#/stable/[email protected]
(the value must be the same as the one set for the tls port in
the IP Options).
Installer authorisation
»» 2.4.x --> The first 2 digits (2.4) indicate the control panel firmware
For remote connection, the port on the router must be opened
version, while the third digit (x) increases progressively with routine
(see “Port forwarding (for Remote connection” page 78).
bug fixes. The same rule applies for the naming of the firmware used
by peripherals.
IP card expansion modules are programmed with the IP
Installer authorisation
address 192.168.1.230 by default. Vedo series control panels
communicate using port number 10022 by default.
This procedure enables you to create a new archive, which will contain all
the data relating to the new system that you want to configure.
1. Press the New icon.
Options
Options
Communications
Communication type
Serial port
TCP-IP
Host name or IP address
192.168.1.230
TCP/IP
Port
1.6 CREATING A NEW SYSTEM
Safe Manager
Project
View
Tool
Windows
Help
10022
2. Press the Alarm control panel icon.
OK
New project
Cancel
Categories:
7. Click Ok to confirm the changes you have made.
8. Make sure the TCP/IP connection status icon (in the bottom
right-hand corner of the main window) has changed from
to
Alarm control
unit
.
Project type:
Description
FW
Zones
Vedo 10
2.6.x
10
2
Areas Default
Standard
Vedo 34
2.6.x
34
8
Standard
Vedo 68
2.6.x
68
8
Standard
Vedo 200
2.6.x
200
16
Standard
Ok
1.5 VIEWING THE INSTALLED FIRMWARE VERSION
OF THE CONTROL PANEL
This is necessary when you want to know which firmware version is
installed on the control panel, as some procedures need this information in
order to be carried out fully (creating a new system, for example).
1. Click the View menu.
2. Click the Control panel firmware version menu.
3. Select your control panel from the list and, from the drop-down menu,
select the software version installed on the control panel (see "1.5 Viewing
the installed firmware version of the control panel" on page 6).
New project
Categories:
Alarm control
unit
Safe Manager
Project
View
Tools
Windows
Help
Project type:
Description
FW
Zones
Vedo 10
2.6.x
10
2
Standard
Vedo 34
2.6.x
34
8
Standard
Vedo 68
2.6.x
68
8
Standard
Vedo 200
2.2.x
2.6.x
200
16
Standard
Toolbar
2.4.x
2.5.x
2.6.x
Status strip
Areas
Ok
Central unit firmware version
3. If necessary, enable the installer (see "Installer authorisation" on page
72) and click Read.
Default
Cancel
4. Use the drop-down menu to select whether you wish to create a project
with the "Basic" default settings or the "Standard" default settings.
New project
Central unit firmware version
Categories:
Firmware version
Read
Alarm control
unit
Installer authorisation
Project type:
Description
FW
Zones
Vedo 10
2.6.x
10
2
Areas
Standard
Vedo 34
2.6.x
34
8
Standard
Vedo 68
2.6.x
68
8
Standard
Vedo 200
2.2.x
2.6.x
200
16
Standard
Close
4. Enter the installer access code. The default code is 001961
5. Click Login.
Default
Basic
Standard
Execute
6
Cancel
Ok
Cancel
5. Click OK.
»» A system with default parameters will be created. These parameters do
not necessarily correspond to the installed system.
< BACK
< BACK
2. Standard procedures
This chapter illustrates the standard procedures usually carried out using
the Safe Manager software. For example: saving the configurations for
your system, opening previously saved system files, sending configuration
parameters to the control panel and reading the control panel configuration
parameters, etc...
2.1 SAVING THE CONFIGURATION FOR THE SYSTEM
IN USE
Once the system has been configured, the settings can be saved in the
Safe Manager database for any necessary servicing or updating purposes.
1. Click on the Save icon.
View
When the list of systems is particularly long, the name (or part of the
name) of the system you want to load can be entered in the text line,
pressing the Filter button afterwards: all systems containing the text
entered in the Customer name line will appear on the list, while the
others will remain hidden.
2.3 PRINT PROJECT FUNCTION
This function (available from version 2.4.2.2) allows you to print the project,
or parts of the project, in .pdf format.
1. While the project is open, click the Print... icon.
Safe Manager
Safe Manager
Project
FILTER OPTION
Tool
Windows
Help
2. Fill in the form. The "Customer name" field is a required field.
Save project
Project
View
Customer name:
Help
2. Tick the project options you wish to print.
3. Press Ok to print the report in .pdf format.
The export procedure is used to obtain a system configuration file. This file
can then be opened on other PCs (still using Safe Manager software) and
emailed, archived, etc.
Addrss
Town:
Telephone:
1. While the project is open, click the Project menu.
2. Click Export.
Mobile:
Notes:
Safe Manager
Project
View
Add
Cancel
3. Click Ok.
2.2 OPENING THE CONFIGURATION FOR A
PREVIOUSLY SAVED SYSTEM
1. Click on the Open icon.
Safe Manager
View
Tool
Windows
Help
2. Select the project from the list and press Ok.
Open existing project
Customer name:
Filter
Customer name
Address
Town/city
FW #
Last saved
Customer 2
Customer address
Customer town/city
2.2.x
20/02/2014 15:44:36
Customer address
Customer town/city
2.2.x
23/02/2014 09:12:22
Tools
Windows
Help
Ctrl+N
VedoOpen
68 - #FW: 2.2x
Keypads
Control devices
Ctrl+S
Save
Status ID Description
Keypads (1)
Active
1 Keypad 1
Safetouch
Print...
Touch devices
Absent 2 Keypad 2
Export
RFID readers
Absent 3 Keypad 3
Import...
Phone App
Absent 4 Keypad 4
Bridge
Properties on bus
Expansions
Absent 5 Keypad 5
8 input/output
expansions
3. Save the
file to your
PC (the save screen depends
on the operating
Close
Absent 6 Keypad 6
Power
supplies
system in
use).
Exit
Isolators
Absent 7 Keypad 7
4. Once you have chosen where to save it, you will be asked if you want
Radio expansions
Absent 8 Keypad 8
to protect
the
file
with
a
password.
Radio outputs / sirens
Radio controls
Safe Manager
Radio zones
Wired zones (9)
Do you
want to protect the project with a password?
Groups
in And
Projects saved with a password cannot be recovered if you forget the
Areas
password
Outputs (3)
Events group
Scenarios
Yes
No
Codes
Users (1)
Installers (2)
Access level
5a.If you select
NO the software exports the project and provides
Proximity
keys procedure is complete in a pop-up window.
notification
that the
5b. If youCommunication
select YES interfaces
a pop-up window will appear, prompting you to enter
IP Options
a password
to protect the project.
GSM Options
Password
Pal-Ip video module
Communicator
Project
password
Options
(telephony)
Delete
OK
Caution: If the control panel has been updated with more
recent firmware than the version used when the project was
saved, the Safe Manager software will ask for the project to
be updated.
7
Phone book
Password:
Cancel
Digital communicator contacts list
Generic events
Detailed events
OK
Cancel
Contact-ID Map
Free voice messages
SMS
Fill in the
required fields (MAX 15 characters) and press Ok.
Email
»» The software
exports
the project and provides notification
Service voice
messages
procedure
is complete in a pop-up window.
Timetable programmer
Timer
Activations
System parameters
Events log
Confirm Password:
6b.
that the
< BACK
Checked areas
OK
Customer 1
Windows
2.4 EXPORTING A SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
Project information
Project
Tool
Area
Area 1
Area 2
Area 3
Area 4
Area 5
Area 6
Area 7
Area 8
< BACK
2.5 IMPORTING A SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
Send configuration parameters
Poer supply station
Log
1. Click the Project menu.
2. Click Import.
Safe Manager
Project
View
Add
Tools
Windows
Help
Expansions from bus
Generic events
Users
Pal-Ip video module
Detailed events
Installers
Wired zones
Radio expansions
Contact-ID Map
Access level
Groups in And
Radio zones
Outputs
Radio outputs
Voice messages (text only)
Events groups
Radiocontrols
SMS
Areas
Isolators
Email
Activations
Events to save
Power supply units
Service voice messages
Timer models
Safetouch
Proximity keys
Programming timetables
Timer
Directory
Options (telephony)
Telephone contacts list
GSM Options
Digital communicator contacts list
RFID readers
IP Options
Touch devices
Cloud Options
App Phone
Interrupt
Submit
Options
Display technical alarms
Display tamper
Show
Bridge
Checked areas
Enable proximity reader
Close
Send service texts
Quick activation
Send quick alarms with function key
To select / deselect all parameters, use the icons in the top left-hand corner
Display areas status
of Area
the box.
Display alarm memory
Display parameters
open zones
Send configuration
Display chime zones
Area 1
Area 2
System status display time
Log
Unlimited
Seconds
Unlimited
Cycles
Poer supply station
120
The same procedure applies to receiving data from the
System parameters
control panel by pressing
the
Receive icon.
Tamper alarm
cycles
Area 3
Area 4
Scenarios
0
2.7 SENDING AN AUDIO PACKAGE
Area 5
Wired zones
Technical alarms cycles (bus / voltage levels)
Area 6
Cycles to enable
0
Caution: To use thisUnlimited
function, you need
the voice
message card.
Groups in And
Area 7
Area 8
Proximity card cycle actions
This procedure is used to Action
send1 service voiceScenario
messages
/ Activat (see "3.12.10
Total activation
Outputs
Service voice messages" on page 67), free voice messages
(see "3.12.7
Action 2
Scenario / Activat
Scenario P1
Free voice messages" on page 66) and voice control messages to the
EventsScenario
groups
Scenario / Activat
P2
Action 3
control panel.
1. While the project is open,
click
audio...
Scenario
/ Activat
Scenario P1+P2
Action
4 the icon Send
Safe Manager
Project
View
Partial keys
Tools
Windows
P1 key function
P2 key function
2.
Areas
Help
<No function
Events to save
<No function
Control devices
Vedo 68 - #FW: 2.6x
Keypads
Function keys
Control devices
Status IDtoDescription
In the Keypads
pop-up(1) window,
package
send: free
F1 keyselect
function which <No
function
Activatecontrol
1 Keypad
1
voice messages
messages
Safetouch / service messages or voice
F2 key function
<No function
Touch devices
(preconfigured).
Absent 2 Keypad 2
RFID readers
<No function
F3 key function
Send audio
Absent 3 Keypad 3
App Phone
Keypads
Safetouch
Bridge
Audio messages
F4 key function
Using
this option, allon
audio
contents generated in the Voice
Expansions
bus
Messages, Service Voice Messages and Generic Events
8 input/output expansions
sections will be sent to the control unit
RFID readers
<NoAbsent
function 4 Keypad 4
Power supplies units
Isolators
Radio expansions
Regenerate
audio
Submit
Radio outputs / sirens
Radio controls
Audio messages from voice menu
Options
Radio zones
Using this option, all audio contents making up the voice
Enable
reader are
Wired
(9)
menu
will bezones
sent to the
controlproximity
unit. The messages
already
ready to
sent and do not require any preparation
Groups
inbe
And
Quick activation
by the installer.
Areas
Send quick alarms with function key
Outputs (3)
Display areas status Submit
Events group
Scenarios Display alarm memory
Close
Display open zones
Codes
Absent
5 Keypad 5
Absent
6 Keypad 6
Absent
7 Keypad 7
Absent
8 Keypad 8
App Phone
Absent
7 Keypad 7
Absent
8 Keypad 8
Area 1
Area 2
Area 3
Area 4
Area 5
Area 6
Submit
Display technical alarms
6 Keypad 6
Display tamper
5 Keypad 5
Absent
Show
Checked areas
8
Absent
Bridge
Display technical alarms
Display tamper
Show
Checked areas
8 input/output expansions
IPPower
Options
supplies units
GSM Options
Isolators
Pal-Ip video module
Radio expansions
Communicator
Radio outputs / sirens
Options (telephony)
Radio controls
Phone book
Radiocommunicator
zones
Digital
contacts list
Wired
zones
(9)
Generic
events
Groups
in
And
Detailed events
Areas
Contact-ID Map
Outputs
(3) messages
Free voice
Events
SMS group
Free voice
Scenario
Actionmessages
3
Display open
zones/ Activat
SMS
Display chime
zones/ Activat
Scenario
Action 4
Email
Service voice messages
Partial keys
System status display time
Timetable programmer
P1 key function
<No function
F1 key function
<No function
Timer
Unlimited
Seconds
P2 key function
<No function
Activations
System parametersTamper alarm cycles
Events log Function keys
Unlimited
Cycles
Area
Touch devices
Vedo 68 - #FW: 2.6x
Keypads
Control devices
Status ID Description
Keypads (1)
Activate 1 Keypad 1
Safetouch
Touch devices
Absent 2 Keypad 2
RFID readers
Absent 3 Keypad 3
App Phone
Interrupt
»» In this case
all parameters linked to the screen
will be sent. In the imageArea
Absent 4 Keypad 4
Bridge
above,
therefore,
all
the
parameters
linked
to
the
Keypads
screen
will
Expansions on bus
Absent 5 Keypad 5
be sent.8 input/output expansions
Absent 6 Keypad 6
Power supplies units
Users (1) Display chime zones
Absent 7 Keypad 7
Or from theIsolators
main bar by pressing the icon Send...
Installers (2)
REGENERATE
AUDIO OPTION
Radio expansions
Absent 8 Keypad 8
AccessSystem
level status display time
Safe Manager
Radio outputs / sirens
regenerate
all voiceSeconds
messages
in a package (not including
Area 1 This option can
Proximity
keys
Unlimited
120
Radio
controls
Project
View
Tools
Windows
Help
messages)
using the option selected in Voice configuration
Communication
interfaces
Area 2 voice control
Radio zones
Wired zones (9)
IP Options
oncycles
page 66).
Tamper alarm
Area 3 (see "Voice configuration"
Groups in And
GSM Options
Unlimited
Cycles
0
Area 4
Vedo
68
#FW:
2.6x
Keypads
Areas
Pal-Ip video module
Control(3)
devices
Outputs
Area 5
Communicator
Options
Status ID Description
Technical alarms cycles (bus / voltage levels)
Keypads
Events
group (1)
Area 6
Options (telephony)
Enable proximity reader
Activate 1 Keypad 1
Unlimited
Cycles
0
Scenarios
Safetouch
Phone book
Area
7
Codes
Quick activation
Touch devices
Absent 2 Keypad 2
Digital communicator contacts list
Area 8
Users
RFID(1)
readers
Proximity card cycle actions
Generic events Send quick alarms with function key
Absent 3 Keypad 3
Installers
(2)
App Phone
Action 1
Scenario / Activat
Total activation
Detailed
events Display areas status
Area
Absent
4 Keypad
4 control
Bridgelevel
»» In this Access
case,
you can select which parameters
to send
to the
ActionMap
2
Scenario
/
Activat
Scenario P1
Contact-ID
Proximity
keys
Display alarm memory
Expansions on bus
panel.
Communication interfaces
Checked areas
2.6 SENDING / RECEIVING CONTROL PANEL
PARAMETERS
Messages
Interfaces
Keypads
Ctrl+N
Codes
8 input/output expansions
Scenarios
Control devices
VedoOpen
68 - #FW: 2.2x
Keypads
Control devices
Ctrl+S
Save
Status ID Description
Keypads (1)
Activate 1 Keypad 1
Safetouch
Print...
Touch devices
Absent 2 Keypad 2
Export
RFID readers
Absent 3 Keypad 3
Import...
Phone App
Absent 4 Keypad 4
Bridge
Properties on bus
Expansions
Absent 5 Keypad 5
8 input/output expansions
Close
Absent 6 Keypad 6
Power supplies
Exit
Isolators
Absent 7 Keypad 7
Radio expansions
Absent 8 Keypad 8
3. Select the
file
from
your
PC
(the
selection
screen
depends on the
Radio outputs / sirens
operating
system
in use).
Radio
controls
4. If the project
is protected, you will be asked to enter and confirm the
Radio zones
Wired zones (9)
password.
Groups in And
Password
Areas
Outputs (3)
Project password
Events group
Password:
Scenarios
Codes
Confirm Password:
Users (1)
Installers (2)
OK
Cancel
Access level
Proximity keys
»» The
software imports
Communication
interfacesthe project and provides notification that the
procedure
is complete in a pop-up window.
IP Options
GSM
Options
»» At this
point
the project is saved in the Safe Manager software
Pal-Ip video module
database
and can be reopened by carrying out the procedure
Communicator
described
in chapter “2.2 Opening the configuration for a previously
Options (telephony)
saved
system”
Phone
book on page 7.
Digital communicator contacts list
Generic events
Detailed events
Contact-ID Map
Free voice messages
Once you have
SMSconfigured the control panel, you will need to transfer the
Emailfor them to take effect.
settings in order
Service voice messages
You can do
this
from the individual configuration screens by pressing the
Timetable programmer
icon Send... Timer
Safe ManagerActivations
System parameters
Project
View
Tools
Windows
Help
Events log
Events
System parameters
Scenario P2
Scenario P1+P2
120
0
F2 key function
<No cycles
function(bus / voltage levels)
Technical alarms
< BACK
Area 1
Area 2
Area 3
Area 4
Area 5
Area 6
Sen
Area 7
Area 8
< BACK
2.8 RECEIVING THE EVENTS LOG
This option allows you to download the control panel events log for later
analysis.
1. While the project is open, click the icon Receive events log...
Safe Manager
Project
View
Tools
Windows
Help
Keypads
Absent
2 Keypad 2
Absent
3 Keypad 3
Absent
4 Keypad 4
Absent
5 Keypad 5
Absent
6 Keypad 6
Absent
7 Keypad 7
Absent
8 Keypad 8
Area
Display technical alarms
3.
4.
Touch devices
Events log
RFID readers
Press the Receive key to receive the events log saved on
App
the control
unit.Phone
To view the received log, browse the project
tree to the
option "Events register -> Events log"
Bridge
Expansions on bus
8 input/output expansions Receive
Power supplies units
Isolators
Close
Radio expansions
Radio outputs / sirens
Enter theRadio
installer
access code. The default
controls
Click Login.
Radio zones
Wired zones (9)
Groups in And
Events log
Events Areas
log
Press the Receive
key to receive the events log saved on the
Login
Outputs
(3)
control unit. To view the received log, browse the project tree
to the option "Events register -> Events log"
Request code
Events
group
Enter access code
Scenarios
******
Receive
Cancel
Login
Codes
Display tamper
Events logSafetouch
ID Description
Activate 1 Keypad 1
Show
Status
Checked areas
Vedo 68 - #FW: 2.6x
Control devices
2. Click Receive.
Keypads (1)
Unlimited
Unlimited
Area 7
Area 8
2.9 RESET ACCESS CODE
8 Keypad 8
Users (1)
Installers (2)
Access level
Proximity keys
9
Communication interfaces
IP Options
GSM Options
Pal-Ip video module
Communicator
Options (telephony)
Phone book
Digital communicator contacts list
Generic events
Detailed events
Contact-ID Map
Free voice messages
SMS
Email
Service voice messages
Timetable programmer
Timer
Area
Display technical alarms
7 Keypad 7
Absent
Display tamper
6 Keypad 6
Absent
Cycles
0
Action 1
Scenario / Activat
Total activation
Action 2
Scenario / Activat
Scenario P1
Action 3
Scenario / Activat
Scenario P2
Action 4
Scenario / Activat
Scenario P1+P2
P1 key function
<No function
P2 key function
<No function
Function keys
Show
Absent
72
0
Partial keys
Checked areas
See
Cycles
Proximity card cycle actions
»» Once
the events log screen will open automatically
(see “3.15.1 Events Log” on page 73).
5 Keypad 5
120
Technical alarms cycles (bus / voltage levels)
Area 6
Absent
Seconds
Tamper alarm cycles
Area 5
2.10 INSTALLER AUTHORISATION
Display alarm memory
Unlimited
Area 2
Area 4
4 Keypad 4
Display areas status
System status display time
Area 1
Area 3
Absent
Quick activation
Send quick alarms with function key
Display chime zones
Close
Users (1)
Installers (2)
Access level
login
is complete,
Proximity keys
Bridge
Expansions on bus
8 input/output expansions
Power supplies units
“InstallerIsolators
authorisation” on page
Radio expansions
Radio outputs / sirens
Radio controls
Radio zones
Wired zones (9)
Groups in And
Areas
Outputs (3)
Events group
Scenarios
Codes
Enable proximity reader
Display open zones
code is 001961.
Communication interfaces
IP Options
GSM Options
Pal-Ip video module
Communicator
This processOptions
resets(telephony)
the cache for previously entered user codes. Therefore,
when a newPhone
attempt
bookto connect to the control panel is made, the access
codes will beDigital
requested
again.
communicator
contacts list
Generic
events
1. While the
project
is open, click the icon Reset access code.
Detailed events
Safe Manager
Contact-ID Map
voice messages
Project Free View
Tools
Windows
Help
SMS
Email
Service voice messages
Vedo 68 - #FW: 2.6x
Keypads
Timetable programmer
Control devices
Status ID Description
Timer
2. Click Yes.
Keypads (1)
Activations
Activate 1 Keypad 1
Safetouch
System parameters
Touch devices
Caution:
this procedure does not reset
the codes
saved
on
Absent
2 Keypad
2
Events log
RFID
readerspanel, only the Safe Manager memory.
the
control
Absent 3 Keypad 3
App Phone
Options
F1 key function
<No function
F2 key function
<No function
F3 key function
<No function
F4 key function
<No function
Options
Enable proximity reader
Quick activation
Send quick alarms with function key
Display areas status
Display alarm memory
Display open zones
Display chime zones
Area 1
Area 2
Area 3
Area 4
Area 5
Area 6
Area 7
Area 8
System status display time
Unlimited
Seconds
120
Cycles
0
Tamper alarm cycles
Unlimited
Technical alarms cycles (bus / voltage levels)
Unlimited
Cycles
0
Proximity card cycle actions
Action 1
Scenario / Activat
Total activation
Action 2
Scenario / Activat
Scenario P1
Action 3
Scenario / Activat
Scenario P2
Action 4
Scenario / Activat
Scenario P1+P2
Partial keys
P1 key function
<No function
P2 key function
<No function
Function keys
F1 key function
<No function
F2 key function
<No function
F3 key function
<No function
F4 key function
<No function
< BACK
< BACK
3. System configuration
3.1 CONTROL DEVICES
This group consists of all devices which allow the end user to manage the system connected to the control panel:
• Keypads
• Safetouch
• Touch devices
• RFID readers
• App Phone
• Bridge
3.1.1 Keypads
Keypads
3 Keypad 3
Absent
4 Keypad 4
Absent
5 Keypad 5
Absent
6 Keypad 6
Absent
7 Keypad 7
Absent
8 Keypad 8
Area
Display technical alarms
2 Keypad 2
Absent
Display tamper
Absent
Show
ID Description
Activate 1 Keypad 1
Checked areas
Status
Options
Enable proximity reader
Quick activation
Send quick alarms with function key
Display areas status
Display alarm memory
Display open zones
Display chime zones
Area 1
Area 2
Area 3
Area 4
Area 5
Area 6
Area 7
Area 8
System status display time
Unlimited
Seconds
120
Cycles
0
Tamper alarm cycles
Unlimited
Technical alarms cycles (bus / voltage levels)
Unlimited
Cycles
0
Proximity card cycle actions
Action 1
Scenario / Activat
Total activation
Action 2
Scenario / Activat
Scenario P1
Action 3
Scenario / Activat
Scenario P2
Action 4
Scenario / Activat
Scenario P1+P2
Partial keys
Function of pushbutton P1
<No function
Function of pushbutton P2
<No function
Key functions
F1 key function
<No function
F2 key function
<No function
F3 key function
<No function
F4 key function
<No function
Buzzer
Enabled
Input
Pre-alarm
Output
Pre-alert
Alarm
Key beep
Chime
Failed activation
Activation/Deactivation executed
Send message options
Send detailed events SMS
Send Email messages
Send digital communication
Send notification to App
STATUS/DESCRIPTION PANEL
STATUS / ID / DESCRIPTION
See description Status / ID / Description on page 87.
AREAS PANEL
CHECKED AREAS
Selects the areas that can be controlled by the device during normal operation.
At least one area on which the device can act during normal operation must be assigned to each active device [Reg. 32]
10
< BACK
< BACK
AREA
Column showing the names of the areas in the system. To edit names, see "3.6 Areas" on page 37.
SHOW
Selects the areas of which you want to show the status with the device.
DISPLAY TAMPER
Allows you to choose to which areas the Tamper alarm generated by the device is sent.
At least one area to which the tamper alarms generated by the device are to be signalled must be assigned to each active device [Reg. 5]
DISPLAY TECHNICAL ALARMS
Allows you to choose to which areas the technical alarms generated by the device are sent.
At least one area to which the technical alarms generated by the device are to be signalled must be assigned to each active device [Reg. 6]
CONFIGURATIONS PANEL
OPTIONS
• Enable proximity reader: enables the RFID reader on board the keypad (keypads Art. VEDOLCDPRO only).
• Quick activation: activates the system (total / partial / scenarios) without asking for the user code (total or partial activations of the system will
not be allowed). NOT selected [Reg. 14]
• Send quick alarms with function key: sends alarms when a function key (F1, F2, F3, F4) on the keypad is pressed.
• Display areas status: authorises the device to display the status of the areas.
Selected [Reg. 18]
• Display alarm memory: authorises the device to display the alarm memory.
• Display open zones: authorises the device to display the open zones.
Selected [Reg. 15]
• Display chime zones: authorises the device to display the open chime zones.
SYSTEM STATUS DISPLAY TIME
• Unlimited: provides indications even with the system activated, without any time limits. If not selected, enables the Time box. To guarantee conformity
with standards CEI EN 50131-1 and 50131-3, this option must be disabled. NOT selected [Reg. 17]
• Seconds: if the Unlimited checkbox is not checked, this box establishes the duration, in seconds, of the display of information on the device when
the system is activated. =0 [Reg. 17] The alarm memory signal on the control devices is always visible with the system off even if the system
status is not visible (e.g.: setting the display time of the system zero status)
TAMPER ALARM CYCLES
• Unlimited: allows you to generate infinite cycles of tamper alarms. If not selected, enables the Cycles box.
Selected [Reg. 12]
• Cycles: if the Unlimited checkbox is not active, this box determines the number of tamper alarm cycles that the selected device can generate
within an activation cycle (from one activation to the next).
TECHNICAL ALARMS CYCLES (BUS/VOLTAGE LEVELS)
• Unlimited: allows you to generate infinite cycles of technical alarms. If not selected, enables the Cycles box.
Selected [Reg. 13]
• Cycles: if the Unlimited checkbox is not active, this box determines the number of technical alarm cycles that the selected device can generate
within an activation cycle (from one activation to the next).
PROXIMITY CARD CYCLE ACTIONS (ART. VEDOLCDPRO ONLY)
When a valid and authorised RFID key is passed near a device capable of reading it, as well as performing a Total Activation or Total Deactivation
(of the relevant areas), it is possible to activate the system in custom mode (see user manual for keypad Art. VEDOLCDPRO for operating modes
relating to this function).
If this activation procedure is used, the keypad will display the set scenarios cyclically (Max 4) and the user will have to choose which one to activate.
This section of the program can be used to define the scenarios corresponding to the sequential steps of the cycle shown by the keypad display.
There are two drop-down menus for each of the 4 steps in the cycle. The first menu allows you to select only the Scenario / Activation option,
whereas the second menu allows you to choose from several standard configurations or from a series of custom activation scenarios (see "3.9
Scenarios" on page 42):
• Scenario P1: for the areas covered, activates all zones that have a check in the Partial 1 checkbox (if the default settings are maintained).
• Scenario P2: for the areas covered, activates all zones that have a check in the Partial 2 checkbox (if the default settings are maintained).
• Scenario P1+P2 for the areas covered, activates all zones that have a check in the Partial 1 or Partial 2 checkbox (if the default settings are
maintained).
• Scenario "n" with "n" from 4 to 16: all activations / deactivations defined in the selected scenario are executed.
• Total Activation: for the areas covered, activates all zones.
• Total Deactivation: for the areas covered, deactivates all zones.
11
< BACK
< BACK
PARTIAL KEYS
This section of the program can be used to define the activation functions associated with the keys P1 and P2 on the keypads.
There are two drop-down menus for each of the 2 keys. The first menu allows you to select only the Scenario / Activation option, whereas the second
menu allows you to choose from several standard configurations or from a series of custom activation scenarios (see "3.9 Scenarios" on page 42):
• Scenario P1: for the areas covered, activates all zones that have a check in the Partial 1 checkbox (if the default settings are maintained).
• Scenario P2: for the areas covered, activates all zones that have a check in the Partial 2 checkbox (if the default settings are maintained).
• Scenario P1+P2: for the areas covered, activates all zones that have a check in the Partial 1 or Partial 2 checkbox (if the default settings are
maintained).
• Scenario "n" with "n" from 4 to 16: all activations / deactivations defined in the selected scenario are executed.
FUNCTION KEYS
See description Function keys on page 88.
BUZZER
• Enabled: enables the buzzer function and therefore all the options relating to the section.
• Entry: the buzzer will remain active for the entire duration of the entry time.
• Exit: the buzzer will remain active for the entire duration of the exit time.
Selected [Reg. 7]
Selected [Reg. 8]
Selected [Reg. 9]
• Alarm: the buzzer will remain active for the entire duration of the alarm time.
Selected [Reg. 10]
• Chime: the buzzer will signal the opening of a zone with an active Chime checkbox (Bell). The duration of the signal can be set in the System
Parameters section (see "3.14 System Parameters" on page 70).
• Pre-alarm: the buzzer will remain active for the entire duration of the pre-alarm time.
• Pre-alert: the buzzer will remain active for the entire duration of the automatic pre-alert activation time. The pre-alert time can be set in the Areas
section (see "3.6 Areas" on page 37). Selected [Reg. 11]
• Key beep: every time a key is pressed, a confirmation beep is generated.
• Failed activation*: For each area that is in failed activation status (after an activation), the device buzzer emits a tone lasting about 2 sec.
Selected [Reg. 25]
• Activation/Deactivation executed: the buzzer will indicate the completion of the alarm activation/deactivation procedure. At the end of the
activation procedure (of all the areas in which a change of status is expected), the buzzer will emit a
continuous tone for 1 second. At the end of the deactivation procedure (of all the areas of which deactivation
is expected), the buzzer will emit a continuous tone for 2 seconds. Selected [Reg. 24]
* the "failed activation" signal has priority over the activation/deactivation signals.
SEND MESSAGE OPTIONS
When specific events occur, it is possible to send SMSs, emails, digital communications or notifications to the smartphone app. In this section, you
can assign an initial general permit to generate such events. A second and more detailed screening process is performed in the Detailed Events
section (see “3.12.5 Detailed events” on page 64), where you can select, for each category (e.g. Areas, Zones, Keypads, etc.), the events that
will generate the transmission of messages.
• Send SMS: allows the control panel to send SMSs for events generated by the keypad device. (Only with GSM expansion module Art.
VEDOGSM installed and configured).
• Send Email messages: allows the control panel to send email messages for events generated by the keypad device (only with GSM expansion
module Art. VEDOGSM or IP card Art. VEDOIP installed and configured).
• Send digital communication: allows the control panel to send digital communications for events generated by the keypad device (only with
PSTN line configured or GSM expansion module Art. VEDOGSM installed and configured). Selected [Reg. 16]
• Send notification to App: allows the control panel to send notifications to the smartphone App for events generated by the keypad device (only
with IP card module Art. VEDOIP installed and configured).
12
< BACK
< BACK
3.1.2 Safetouch
In the project there must be no active or isolated SafeTouch devices [Reg. 41]
For the purposes of system management, Safetouch has the same specifications and same functions as a keypad with RFID reader. Unlike on the
keypad, the keys are virtual: the characteristics of the LCD graphic display are used to represent the device's keys. When this section refers to keys,
it means virtual keys.
Safetouch
2 Safetouch 2
Absent
3 Safetouch 3
Absent
4 Safetouch 4
Area
Area 1
Area 2
Area 3
Area 4
Area 5
Area 6
Area 7
Area 8
Display technical alarms
Absent
Display tamper
ID Description
Activate 1 Safetouch 1
Checked areas
Status
Terminals
I1
I2
Options
Quick activation
In
Quick alarms
Display areas status
In
I3
RLY
In
Out
Network parameters
Suspend due to no network
IP address
.
.
.
Display open zones
Netmask
.
.
.
Display chime zones
Gateway
.
.
.
Tamper enabled
Address acquisition mode
System status display time
Unlimited
Seconds
120
Tamper alarm cycles
Unlimited
Cycles
0
Static address
VIP options
Logic address
00002001
Streaming video timeout
60
seconds
Technical alarms cycles (bus / voltage levels)
Unlimited
Cycles
0
Px key functions
P1 key function
<No function
P2 key function
<No function
P3 key function
<No function
P4 key function
<No function
Fx key functions
F1 key function
<No function
F2 key function
<No function
F3 key function
<No function
Buzzer
Enabled
Input
Pre-alarm
Output
Pre-alert
Alarm
Key beep
Chime
Failed activation
Activation/Deactivation executed
Send message options
Send detailed events SMS
Send Email messages
Send digital communication
Send notification to App
STATUS/DESCRIPTION PANEL
STATUS / ID / DESCRIPTION
See description Status / ID / Description on page 87.
AREAS PANEL
CHECKED AREAS
Selects the areas that can be controlled by the device during normal operation.
AREA
Column showing the names of the areas in the system. To edit names, see "3.6 Areas" on page 37
DISPLAY TAMPER
Allows you to choose to which areas the Tamper alarm generated by the device is sent.
DISPLAY TECHNICAL ALARMS
Allows you to choose to which areas the technical alarms generated by the device are sent.
13
< BACK
< BACK
CONFIGURATIONS PANEL
OPTIONS
• Quick activation: activates the system (total / partial / scenarios) without asking for the user code (total or partial activations of the system will
not be allowed).
• Quick alarms: sends alarms when a function key on the device is pressed.
• Display areas status: authorises the device to display the status of the areas.
• Suspend when no mains power: authorises the device to switch itself off in order to reduce battery consumption during a mains power outage.
• Tamper enabled: enables device tamper.
• Display open zones: authorises the device to display the open zones.
• Display chime zones: authorises the device to display the open chime zones.
SYSTEM STATUS DISPLAY TIME
• Unlimited: provides indications even with the system activated, without any time limits. If not selected, enables the Time box. To guarantee
conformity with standards CEI EN 50131-1 and 50131-3, this Option must be disabled.
• Seconds: if the Unlimited checkbox is not checked, this box establishes the duration, in seconds, of the display of information on the device
when the system is activated. The alarm memory signal on the control devices is always visible with the system off even if the system
status is not visible (e.g.: setting the display time of the system zero status).
TAMPER ALARM CYCLES
• Unlimited: allows you to generate infinite cycles of tamper alarms. If not selected, enables the Cycles box.
• Cycles: if the Unlimited checkbox is not active, this box determines the number of tamper alarm cycles that the selected device can generate
within an activation cycle (from one activation to the next).
TECHNICAL ALARMS CYCLES (BUS/VOLTAGE LEVELS)
• Unlimited: allows you to generate infinite cycles of technical alarms. If not selected, enables the Cycles box.
• Cycles: if the Unlimited checkbox is not active, this box determines the number of technical alarm cycles that the selected device can generate
within an activation cycle (from one activation to the next).
PX KEY FUNCTIONS
See description Px key functions on page 87.
FX KEY FUNCTIONS
See description Function keys on page 88.
BUZZER
See description Buzzer on page 88.
SEND MESSAGE OPTIONS
See description Send Message options on page. 89.
TERMINALS
Safetouch is equipped as standard with three terminals that can be configured as inputs or outputs and a fourth terminal that is output only. In this
box, you can set whether each of the first three terminals is to be used as an input or an output. By clicking the terminal icon you can switch the
selection from In to Out and vice-versa.
NETWORK PARAMETERS
Only if IP card expansion module Art. VEDOIP is present and configured.
• IP address: This box is for entering the network address that the device needs in order to be recognised and to communicate correctly on the
local network with the PAL/IP devices present. Bear in mind that the address must be part of the same network as the IP Module
in the control panel.
• Netmask: This box is for entering the same Netmask address as used for the IP card expansion module connected to the control panel (see
“3.11.1 IP Options” on page 50).
• Gateway:This box is for entering the same Gateway address as used for the IP card expansion module connected to the control panel (see
“3.11.1 IP Options” on page 50).
• Address acquisition mode: for future uses.
VIP OPTIONS
Configurations for viewing the cameras connected to PAL-IP modules Art. VEDOCCTV.
• Logic address: field for entering a logic address for the device. The address must be a completely unique 8-digit number.
• Streaming video timeout: determines the duration of a video call to the cameras. The same value must be set for the PAL-IP modules (see
"3.11.3 Pal/IP video module" on page 54). If the values are different, the lower value is applied.
14
< BACK
< BACK
3.1.3 Touch devices
In the project there must be no active or isolated Touch devices [Reg. 42]
This group of devices includes: Planux Manager, Minitouch, PC Touch, Icona ViP and Icona SBC. Depending on the selected device, some settings
will be accessible or otherwise.
Touch devices
2 Touch device 2
Absent
3 Touch device 3
Absent
4 Touch device 4
Area
Display technical alarms
Absent
Display tamper
ID Description
Activate 1 Touch device 1
Checked areas
Status
Options
Network parameters
Quick activation
Device type
Quick alarms
.
.
.
Suspend due to no network
Netmask
.
.
.
Tamper enabled
Gateway
.
.
.
Display open zones
Address acquisition mode
Display areas status
Display chime zones
Communications
Area 1
Area 2
Area 3
Area 4
Area 5
Area 6
Area 7
Area 8
Minitouch
IP address
VIP options
485 Bus
System status display time
Unlimited
Static address
Seconds
120
Cycles
0
Logic address
00002001
Streaming video timeout
60
seconds
Tamper alarm cycles
Unlimited
Technical alarms cycles (bus / voltage levels)
Unlimited
Cycles
0
Px key functions
P1 key function
<No function
P2 key function
<No function
P3 key function
<No function
P4 key function
<No function
Fx key functions
F1 key function
<No function
F2 key function
<No function
F3 key function
<No function
Buzzer
Enabled
Input
Pre-alarm
Output
Pre-alert
Alarm
Failed activation
Chime
Activation/Deactivation executed
Send message options
Send detailed events SMS
Send Email messages
Send digital communication
Send notification to App
STATUS/DESCRIPTION PANEL
STATUS / ID / DESCRIPTION
See description Status / ID / Description on page 87.
AREAS PANEL
CHECKED AREAS
Selects the areas that can be controlled by the device during normal operation.
AREA
Column showing the names of the areas in the system. To edit names, see "3.6 Areas" on page 37
DISPLAY TAMPER
Allows you to choose to which areas the Tamper alarm generated by the device is sent.
DISPLAY TECHNICAL ALARMS
Allows you to choose to which areas the technical alarms generated by the device are sent.
15
< BACK
< BACK
CONFIGURATIONS PANEL
OPTIONS
• Quick activation: activates the system (total / partial / scenarios) without asking for the user code (total or partial activations of the system will
not be allowed).
• Quick alarms: sends alarms when a function key on the device is pressed.
• Display areas status: authorises the device to display the status of the areas.
• Suspend when no mains power: authorises the device to switch itself off in order to reduce battery consumption during a mains power outage.
• Tamper enabled: enables device tamper.
• Display open zones: authorises the device to display the open zones.
• Display chime zones: authorises the device to display the open chime zones.
• Communication: displays the channel with which to communicate with the control panel. Non settable parameter, read-only.
SYSTEM STATUS DISPLAY TIME
• Unlimited: provides indications even with the system activated, without any time limits. If not selected, enables the Time box. To guarantee
conformity with standards CEI EN 50131-1 and 50131-3, this option must be disabled.
• Seconds: if the Unlimited checkbox is not checked, this box establishes the duration, in seconds, of the display of information on the device
when the system is activated. The alarm memory signal on the control devices is always visible with the system off even if the system
status is not visible (e.g.: setting the display time of the system zero status).
TAMPER ALARM CYCLES
• Unlimited: allows you to generate infinite cycles of tamper alarms. If not selected, enables the Cycles box.
• Cycles: if the Unlimited checkbox is not active, this box determines the number of tamper alarm cycles that the selected device can generate
within an activation cycle (from one activation to the next).
TECHNICAL ALARMS CYCLES (BUS/VOLTAGE LEVELS)
• Unlimited: allows you to generate infinite cycles of technical alarms. If not selected, enables the Cycles box.
• Cycles: if the Unlimited checkbox is not active, this box determines the number of technical alarm cycles that the selected device can generate
within an activation cycle (from one activation to the next).
PX KEY FUNCTIONS
Keys available on touch devices Planux Manager, Minitouch, Icona ViP and Icona SBC.
See description Px key functions on page 87.
FX KEY FUNCTIONS
Keys available on touch devices Planux Manager, Minitouch, Icona ViP and Icona SBC.
See description Function keys on page 88.
BUZZER
See description Buzzer on page 88.
SEND MESSAGE OPTIONS
See description Send Message options on page. 89.
NETWORK PARAMETERS
Only if IP card expansion module Art. VEDOIP is present and configured.
• Device type: this drop-down menu is used to select the device model from Planux Manager, Minitouch, PC Touch, Icona ViP and Icona SBC
.
.
• IP address: This box is for entering the network address that the device needs in order to be recognised and to communicate correctly on the
local network with the PAL/IP devices present. Bear in mind that the address must be part of the same network as the IP Module
in the control panel.
• Netmask: This box is for entering the same Netmask address as used for the IP card expansion module connected to the control panel (see
“3.11.1 IP Options” on page 50).
• Gateway: This box is for entering the same Gateway address as used for the IP card expansion module connected to the control panel (see
“3.11.1 IP Options” on page 50).
• Address acquisition mode: displays the mode with which to acquire an IP address. Non settable parameter, read-only.
VIP OPTIONS
Configurations for viewing the cameras connected to PAL-IP modules Art. VEDOCCTV.
• Logic address: field for entering a logic address for the device. The address must be a completely unique 8-digit number.
• Streaming video timeout: determines the duration of a video call to the cameras. The same value must be set for the PAL-IP modules (see
"3.11.3 Pal/IP video module" on page 54). If the values are different, the lower value is applied.
16
< BACK
< BACK
3.1.4 RFID readers
In the project there must be no active or isolated RFID readers [Reg. 43]
RFID readers
2 Reader 2
Absent
3 Reader 3
Absent
4 Reader 4
Active
5 Reader 5
Absent
6 Reader 6
Absent
7 Reader 7
Absent
8 Reader 8
Area
Display technical alarms
Absent
Display tamper
ID Description
Activate 1 Reader 1
Checked areas
Status
LED ON time on proximity key
Unlimited
Seconds 0
(+30)
Tamper alarm cycles
Unlimited
Cycles
0
Technical alarms cycles (bus / voltage levels)
Unlimited
Cycles
0
Cycle actions
Area 1
Red LED cycle action
Scenario / Activat
Total activation
Area 2
Yellow LED cycle action
Scenario / Activat
Scenario P1
Area 3
Blue LED cycle action
Scenario / Activat
Scenario P2
Area 4
Green LED cycle action
Scenario / Activat
Scenario P1+P2
Area 5
Area 6
Area 7
Area 8
Buzzer
Enabled
Input
Pre-alarm
Output
Pre-alert
Alarm
Failed activation
Chime
Activation/Deactivation executed
Forced activation
Send message options
Send detailed events SMS
Send Email messages
Send digital communication
Send notification to App
STATUS/DESCRIPTION PANEL
STATUS / ID / DESCRIPTION
See description Status / ID / Description on page 87.
AREAS PANEL
CHECKED AREAS
Selects the areas that can be controlled by the device during normal operation.
AREA
Column showing the names of the areas in the system. To edit names, see "3.6 Areas" on page 37
DISPLAY TAMPER
Allows you to choose to which areas the Tamper alarm generated by the device is sent.
DISPLAY TECHNICAL ALARMS
Allows you to choose to which areas the technical alarms generated by the device are sent.
CONFIGURATIONS PANEL
LED ON TIME ON PROXIMITY KEY
• Unlimited: allows continuous display of the information provided by the 4 reader LEDs. If not selected, enables the Time box. To guarantee
conformity with standards CEI EN 50131-1 and 50131-3, this option must be disabled.
• Seconds: if the Unlimited checkbox is not active, this box determines the time, in seconds, for which the RFID reader is enabled to show the
information associated to its LEDs, after the presentation of a valid, authorised RFID key. The system will automatically add 30
seconds to the set time.
TAMPER ALARM CYCLES
• Unlimited: allows you to generate infinite cycles of tamper alarms. If not selected, enables the Cycles box.
• Cycles: if the Unlimited checkbox is not active, this box determines the number of tamper alarm cycles that the selected device can generate
within an activation cycle (from one activation to the next).
TECHNICAL ALARMS CYCLES (BUS/VOLTAGE LEVELS)
• Unlimited: allows you to generate infinite cycles of technical alarms. If not selected, enables the Cycles box.
• Cycles: if the Unlimited checkbox is not active, this box determines the number of technical alarm cycles that the selected device can generate
within an activation cycle (from one activation to the next).
17
< BACK
< BACK
CYCLE ACTIONS
When a valid and authorised RFID key is passed near an RFID reader, as well as performing a Total Activation or Total Deactivation (of the relevant
areas), it is possible to activate the system in custom mode (see user manual for RFID reader Art. VEDOPROX for operating modes relating to this
function).
If this activation procedure is used, the RFID reader will display the set scenarios cyclically (max. 4) via the LEDs and the user will have to choose
which one to activate.
This section of the program can be used to define the scenarios corresponding to the sequential steps of the cycle shown by the RFID reader LEDs.
There are two drop-down menus for each of the 4 steps in the cycle (identified by the colours of the 4 LEDs on the RFID reader). The first menu
allows you to select only the Scenario / Activation option, whereas the second menu allows you to choose from several standard configurations or
from a series of custom activation scenarios (see "3.9 Scenarios" on page 42):
• Scenario P1: for the areas covered, activates all zones that have a check in the Partial 1 checkbox (if the default settings are maintained).
• Scenario P2: for the areas covered, activates all zones that have a check in the Partial 2 checkbox (if the default settings are maintained).
• Scenario P1+P2: for the areas covered, activates all zones that have a check in the Partial 1 or Partial 2 checkbox (if the default settings are
maintained).
• Scenario "n" with "n" from 4 to 16: all activations / deactivations defined in the selected scenario are executed.
• Total Activation: for the areas covered, activates all zones.
• Total Deactivation: for the areas covered, deactivates all zones.
BUZZER
See description Buzzer on page 88.
FORCED ACTIVATION
When the function is enabled, the RFID reader will always carry out activation, forcing the activation lock conditions.
SEND MESSAGE OPTIONS
See description Send Message options on page. 89.
MEANING OF READER LEDS IN NORMAL CONDITIONS
RED
OFF
ON
FLASHING SLOWLY
FLASHING QUICKLY
YELLOW
BLUE
GREEN
All areas covered by the reader are deactivated. There are no saved alarms relating to the areas.
The activation profile associated
with the RED LED (*) is active
The activation profile associated
with the YELLOW LED (*) is active
All areas covered by the reader are
deactivated. There is an area alarm
or sabotage memory, or a control
panel sabotage memory.
At least one of the areas covered
by the reader is activated. There
is an area alarm or sabotage
memory, or a control panel
sabotage memory.
The activation profile associated
with the BLUE LED (*) is active
The activation profile associated
with the GREEN LED (*) is active
System activated with unknown
scenario (not saved).
At least one area covered by the
reader is not ready for activation.
One or more anomalies have been
detected in the areas covered by
the reader and/or there is a system
fault.
(*) Indications relating to LED ON status have priority over any other indications (flashing) that may be present with the exception of the alarm
memory, Flashing Red, which takes priority over Red LED ON.
MEANING OF READER LEDS DURING PRESENTATION OF THE KEY
RED
OFF
ON
FLASHING QUICKLY
YELLOW
BLUE
GREEN
Request for deactivation of all areas covered by the reader.
Request for activation of the
activation profile associated with
the RED LED
Request for activation of the
activation profile associated with
the YELLOW LED
Request for activation of the
activation profile associated with
the BLUE LED
Request for activation of the
activation profile associated with
the GREEN LED
The reader is forcing the activation
profile associated with the RED
LED (*)
The reader is forcing the activation
profile associated with the
YELLOW LED (*)
The reader is forcing the activation
profile associated with the BLUE
LED (*)
The reader is forcing the activation
profile associated with the
GREEN LED (*)
(*) The purpose of forcing is to overcome a 'not ready' condition in one or more of the zones associated with the areas covered by the reader, and/
or an anomaly which can be overridden due to the choices made at the time of control panel configuration.
18
< BACK
< BACK
3.1.5 Phone App
In the project there must be no active or isolated App devices [Reg. 44]
SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS:
√√
√√
√√
√√
√√
√√
SafeManager software installed on a PC, version 2.2.0 or higher.
VEDO10, VEDO34 or VEDO68 control panel, version 2.2.0 or higher.
IP network card Art. VEDOIP, version 2.2.0 or higher.
PAL IP module Art. VEDOCCTV , version 2.2.0 or higher (required if you want to view cameras via the APP).
Camera connected to the PAL IP module (required if you want to view cameras via the App).
Internet connection (for remote App usage).
HOW TO PROCEED
1. In "System Parameters", enable the IP network card.
System parameters
Presence of expansions
GSM
Audio
PSTN
Domotics
Network card (Ip)
Intercom
2. In "IP Options", make sure that the IP address of the network card for the module is compatible with the router network.
IP Options
Options
Check presence of connection to internet
Enable DHCP (obtain IP address automatically)
IP Address
192.168. 1 .230
Subnet mask
255.255.255. 0
Gateway
192.168. 1 . 1
Primary DNS
192.168. 1 . 1
Secondary DNS
0 . 0 . 0 . 0
IP?
Host name
3. In "Pal-Ip Video Module", activate the PAL IP module (if present).
To obtain certification, there must be no Pal/Ip Modules in the project [Reg. 104]
Pal-Ip video module
ID Description
Activat
1 Pal/Ip 1
Absent
2 Pal/Ip 2
Area
Display technical alarms
Status
4. In "Pal-Ip Video Module", press "Assign new IP to the module..." to set a compatible IP address and send programming with "run" (see
Configuration of a Pal/IP module,"3.11.3 Pal/IP video module" on page 54).
Input...
Pal-Ip parameters programming
Area 2
Pal-Ip video module to update
Area 3
Area 4
Current IP address (Pal-Ip video module)
0 . 0 . 0 . 0
Current netmask (Pal-Ip video module)
0 . 0 . 0 . 0
New IP address
New netmask
Gateway
Address acquisition mode
Area 5
Area 6
Area 7
192.168. 1 .234
Ping
Ping
Area 8 255.255.255. 0
192.168. 1 . 1
Static address
Alarm panel
Final IP address (control unit)
192.168. 1 .230
Run
Ping
Close
5. In "Pal-Ip video module", in the section "Cameras installed", select how many cameras are connected and to which areas they refer; in the "Video
acquisition mode” field select PAL.
6. In the "Phone App" section, activate how many Apps on mobile devices will be able to connect to the control panel (max 8), configure the device
by setting the following parameters and set the notifications you wish to receive using the section "Detailed events" (see "3.12.5 Detailed events"
on page 64).
19
< BACK
< BACK
App Phone
Absent
2 App 2
Absent
3 App 3
Absent
4 App 4
Active
5 App 5
Absent
6 App 6
Absent
7 App 7
Absent
8 App 8
Display tamper
ID Description
Activate 1 App 1
Checked areas
Status
Area
Options
Quick activation
Quick alarms
Unlimited System status display time
Tamper alarm cycles
Unlimited
Cycles
0
Function keys
F1 key function
Command
Stop alarms
F2 key function
Command
Reset alarms
F3 key function
Scenario / Activation
Total activation
F4 key function
Scenario / Activation
Total deactivation
Area 5
F5 key function
<No function
Area 6
F6 key function
<No function
Area 7
F7 key function
<No function
Area 8
F8 key function
<No function
Area 1
Area 2
Area 3
Area 4
VIP options
Logical address
00001001
Streaming video timeout
60
seconds
Send message options
Send detailed events SMS
Send Email messages
Send digital communication
Send notification to App
STATUS/DESCRIPTION PANEL
STATUS / ID / DESCRIPTION
See description Status / ID / Description on page 87.
AREAS PANEL
CHECKED AREAS
Selects the areas that can be controlled by the device during normal operation.
AREA
Column showing the names of the areas in the system. To edit names, see "3.6 Areas" on page 37.
DISPLAY TAMPER
Allows you to choose to which areas the Tamper alarm generated by the device is sent.
CONFIGURATIONS PANEL
OPTIONS
• Quick activation: for future uses.
• Quick alarms: for future uses.
• Unlimited System status display time: if enabled, lets you view the notifications received in real time with the app in the background, even
without entering the user password; otherwise authentication is required.
TAMPER ALARM CYCLES
• Unlimited: allows you to generate infinite cycles of tamper alarms. If not selected, enables the Cycles box.
• Cycles: if the unlimited checkbox is not active, this box determines the number of tamper alarm cycles that the selected device can generate
within an activation cycle (from one activation to the next).
FX KEY FUNCTIONS
See description Function keys on page 88.
The function keys F5, F6, F7, F8,will be available only as from version 2.3.x of the Vedo App.
VIP OPTIONS
Configurations for viewing the cameras connected to PAL-IP modules Art. VEDOCCTV.
• Logic address: field for entering a logic address for the device. The address must be a completely unique 8-digit number.
• Streaming video timeout: Determines the maximum duration of a video call; the user can always end the call using the relevant button in the
App. The same value must be set for the PAL-IP modules (see "3.11.3 Pal/IP video module" on page 54). If the
values are different, the lower value is applied.
SEND MESSAGE OPTIONS
See description Send Message options on page. 89.
20
< BACK
< BACK
3.1.6 Bridge
In the project there must be no active or isolated App devices [Reg. 45]
Bridge
2 Bridge 2
Absent
3 Bridge 3
Absent
4 Bridge 4
Area
Display technical alarms
Absent
Display tamper
ID Description
Activate 1 Bridge 1
Checked areas
Status
Options
Quick activation
Quick alarms
Communication
Bus 485
Check connection with the central unit (ethernet)
Check internet connection
Check faults
Tamper alarm cycles
Area 1
Area 2
Area 3
Area 4
Area 5
Area 6
Unlimited
Cycles
0
Technical alarms cycles (bus / voltage levels)
Unlimited
Cycles
0
Send message options
Send detailed events SMS
Area 7
Send Email messages
Area 8
Send digital communication
Send notification to App
STATUS/DESCRIPTION PANEL
STATUS / ID / DESCRIPTION
See description Status / ID / Description on page 87.
AREAS PANEL
CHECKED AREAS
Selects the areas that can be controlled by the device during normal operation.
AREA
Column showing the names of the areas in the system. To edit names, see "3.6 Areas" on page 37.
DISPLAY TAMPER
Allows you to choose to which areas the Tamper alarm generated by the device is sent.
DISPLAY TECHNICAL ALARMS
Allows you to choose to which areas the technical alarms generated by the device are sent.
CONFIGURATIONS PANEL
OPTIONS
• Quick activation: activates the system (total / partial / scenarios) without asking for the user code (total or partial activations of the system will
not be allowed).
• Quick alarms: for future uses
• Communication: drop-down menu, allows you to select the communication bus between the control panel and the Bridge.
• Check connection with the central unit (ethernet): if this function is selected the Bridge checks and verifies the Ethernet connection.
• Check presence of connection to internet: if this function is selected the Bridge checks and verifies the Internet connection.
• Check faults: if this function is selected the device ignores all faults generated.
TAMPER ALARM CYCLES
• Unlimited: allows you to generate infinite cycles of tamper alarms. If not selected, enables the Cycles box.
• Cycles: if the Unlimited checkbox is not active, this box determines the number of tamper alarm cycles that the selected device can generate
within an activation cycle (from one activation to the next).
TECHNICAL ALARMS CYCLES (BUS/VOLTAGE LEVELS)
• Unlimited: allows you to generate infinite cycles of technical alarms. If not selected, enables the Cycles box.
• Cycles: if the Unlimited checkbox is not active, this box determines the number of technical alarm cycles that the selected device can generate
within an activation cycle (from one activation to the next).
SEND MESSAGE OPTIONS
See description Send Message options on page. 89.
21
< BACK
< BACK
3.2 EXPANSIONS ON BUS
3.2.1 8 input/output expansions
This section is for configuring the parameters of the input/output expansions. These are bus expansions which provide 8 configurable inputs (or
open-collector outputs).
8 input/output expansions
Activate 1 Expansion 1
Absent
2 Expansion 2
Absent
3 Expansion 3
Absent
4 Expansion 4
Absent
5 Expansion 5
Absent
6 Expansion 6
Absent
7 Expansion 7
Absent
8 Expansion 8
Absent
9 Expansion 9
Area
Display technical alarms
ID Description
Display tamper
Status
Terminals
1
2
In
In
3
4
5
6
7
8
In
In
In
In
In
In
Tamper alarm cycles
Unlimited
Cycles
0
Technical alarms cycles (bus / voltage levels)
Unlimited
Area 1
Absent 10 Expansion 10
Area 2
Absent 11 Expansion 11
Area 3
Absent 12 Expansion 12
Area 4
Area 5
Cycles
0
Send message options
Send detailed events SMS
Send Email messages
Send digital communication
Send notification to App
Area 6
Area 7
Area 8
STATUS/DESCRIPTION PANEL
STATUS / ID / DESCRIPTION
See description Status / ID / Description on page 87.
AREAS PANEL
AREA
Column showing the names of the areas in the system. To edit names, see "3.6 Areas" on page 37.
DISPLAY TAMPER
Allows you to choose to which areas the Tamper alarm generated by the device is sent.
the device are to be signalled must be assigned to each active device [Reg. 5]
At least one area to which the tamper alarms generated by
DISPLAY TECHNICAL ALARMS
Allows you to choose to which areas the technical alarms generated by the device are sent.
generated by the device are to be signalled must be assigned to each active device [Reg. 6]
At least one area to which the technical alarms
CONFIGURATIONS PANEL
TERMINALS
The expansion devices provide 8 terminals as standard; they can be configured as inputs or open collector outputs. In this box, you can set whether
each of the terminals is to be used as an input or an output. By clicking the terminal icon you can switch the selection from In to Out and vice-versa.
TAMPER ALARM CYCLES
• Unlimited: allows you to generate infinite cycles of tamper alarms. If not selected, enables the Cycles box.
Selected [Reg. 12]
• Cycles: if the Unlimited checkbox is not active, this box determines the number of tamper alarm cycles that the selected device can generate
within an activation cycle (from one activation to the next).
TECHNICAL ALARMS CYCLES (BUS/VOLTAGE LEVELS)
• Unlimited: allows you to generate infinite cycles of technical alarms. If not selected, enables the Cycles box.
Selected [Reg. 13]
• Cycles: if the Unlimited checkbox is not active, this box determines the number of technical alarm cycles that the selected device can generate
within an activation cycle (from one activation to the next).
SEND MESSAGE OPTIONS
See description Send Message options on page. 89.
All active devices must permit the control panel to send notification to the digital communicator for events generated by the device itself [Reg. 16].
22
< BACK
< BACK
3.2.2 Power supply units
Power supply units
Activate 1 Power suppl. 1
Absent
2 Power suppl. 2
Absent
3 Power suppl. 3
Absent
4 Power suppl. 4
Absent
5 Power suppl. 5
Absent
6 Power suppl. 6
Absent
7 Power suppl. 7
Absent
8 Power suppl. 8
Area
Display technical alarms
ID Description
Display tamper
Status
Options
Tamper enabled
Network alarm signalling delay (hh:mm:ss)
00:00:55
Battery alarm signalling delay (hh:mm:ss)
00:05:00
Tamper alarm cycles
Unlimited
Reading analogue values
Cycles
0
Technical alarms cycles (bus / voltage levels)
Area 1
Area 2
Unlimited
Cycles
0
Send message options
Output 1 voltage
Output 2 voltage
Output 3 voltage
Tamper voltage
Area 3
Send detailed events SMS
Tamper power supplier
Area 4
Send Email messages
Send digital communication
Output bus voltage
Area 5
Area 6
Send notification to the App
Area 7
Aux 1 voltage
Aux 2 voltage
Read
Area 8
STATUS/DESCRIPTION PANEL
STATUS / ID / DESCRIPTION
See description Status / ID / Description on page 87.
AREAS PANEL
AREA
Column showing the names of the areas in the system. To edit names, see "3.6 Areas" on page 37.
DISPLAY TAMPER
Allows you to choose to which areas the Tamper alarm generated by the device is sent.
the device are to be signalled must be assigned to each active device [Reg. 5]
At least one area to which the tamper alarms generated by
DISPLAY TECHNICAL ALARMS
Allows you to choose to which areas the technical alarms generated by the device are sent.
generated by the device are to be signalled must be assigned to each active device [Reg. 6]
At least one area to which the technical alarms
CONFIGURATIONS PANEL
OPTIONS
• Tamper Enable: enables device tamper.
Selected [Reg. 19]
• Network alarm signalling delay (hh:mm:ss): time box, allows you to set the alarm delay caused by a power outage. On expiry of this time
an alarm will be generated, and if programmed, messages will be sent (SMS, voice, email). No
alarm will be generated if the situation returns to normal before expiry of the timer. Maximum
60 sec [Reg. 20]
• Battery alarm signalling delay (hh:mm:ss): time box, allows you to set the alarm delay caused by a battery fault. On expiry of this time an
alarm will be generated, and if programmed, messages will be sent (SMS, voice, email). No alarm
will be generated if the situation returns to normal before expiry of the timer. Maximum 5 min
[Reg. 21]
TAMPER ALARM CYCLES
• Unlimited: allows you to generate infinite cycles of tamper alarms. If not selected, enables the Cycles box.
Selected [Reg. 12]
• Cycles: if the Unlimited checkbox is not active, this box determines the number of tamper alarm cycles that the selected device can generate
within an activation cycle (from one activation to the next).
SEND MESSAGE OPTIONS
See description Send Message options on page. 89.
All active devices must permit the control panel to send notification to the digital communicator for events generated by the device itself [Reg. 16].
READING ANALOGUE VALUES
• Output 1 voltage: displays the voltage value of open collector output number 1 if enabled.
• Output 2 voltage: displays the voltage value of open collector output number 2 if enabled.
• Output 3 voltage: displays the voltage value of open collector output number 3 if enabled.
• Tamper voltage: displays the analogue voltage value of the 24H input.
• Power supply unit voltage: displays the voltage value at the input of switching power supply unit Art. 30076101. The typical voltage value is
13.8 Vdc +/- 2%.
• Output bus voltage: displays the voltage value at the output of the BUS power supply unit between terminals V+ and V- BUS Out.
• Aux 1 voltage: displays the voltage value at the output between terminals V+ V- Aux 1.
• Aux 2 voltage: displays the voltage value at the output between terminals V+ V- Aux 2.
23
< BACK
< BACK
3.2.3 Isolators
Isolators
Activate 1 Isolator 1
Absent
2 Isolator 2
Absent
3 Isolator 3
Absent
4 Isolator 4
Absent
5 Isolator 5
Absent
6 Isolator 6
Absent
7 Isolator 7
Absent
8 Isolator 8
Absent
9 Isolator 9
Area 1
Absent
10 Isolator 10
Area 2
Absent
11 Isolator 11
Area 3
Absent
12 Isolator 12
Area 4
Absent
13 Isolator 13
Area 5
Absent
14 Isolator 14
Area 6
Absent
15 Isolator 15
Area 7
Absent
16 Isolator 16
Area 8
Area
Display technical alarms
ID Description
Display tamper
Status
Options
Reading analogue values
Enabled tamper
Tamper voltage
Tamper alarm cycles
Unlimited
Cycles
0
Input bus voltage
Output bus voltage
Read
Technical alarms cycles (bus / voltage levels)
Unlimited
Cycles
0
Send message options
Send detailed events SMS
Send Email messages
Send digital communication
Send notification to App
STATUS/DESCRIPTION PANEL
STATUS / ID / DESCRIPTION
See description Status / ID / Description on page 87.
AREAS PANEL
AREA
Column showing the names of the areas in the system. To edit names, see "3.6 Areas" on page 37.
DISPLAY TAMPER
Allows you to choose to which areas the Tamper alarm generated by the device is sent.
the device are to be signalled must be assigned to each active device [Reg. 5]
At least one area to which the tamper alarms generated by
DISPLAY TECHNICAL ALARMS
Allows you to choose to which areas the technical alarms generated by the device are sent.
generated by the device are to be signalled must be assigned to each active device [Reg. 6]
At least one area to which the technical alarms
CONFIGURATIONS PANEL
OPTIONS
• Tamper enable: enables device tamper.
Selected [Reg. 19]
TAMPER ALARM CYCLES
• Unlimited: allows you to generate infinite cycles of tamper alarms. If not selected, enables the Cycles box.
Selected [Reg. 12]
• Cycles: if the Unlimited checkbox is not active, this box determines the number of tamper alarm cycles that the selected device can generate
within an activation cycle (from one activation to the next).
TECHNICAL ALARMS CYCLES (BUS/VOLTAGE LEVELS)
• Unlimited: allows you to generate infinite cycles of technical alarms. If not selected, enables the Cycles box.
Selected [Reg. 13]
• Cycles: if the Unlimited checkbox is not active, this box determines the number of technical alarm cycles that the selected device can generate
within an activation cycle (from one activation to the next).
SEND MESSAGE OPTIONS
See description Send Message options on page. 89.
All active devices must permit the control panel to send notification to the digital communicator for events generated by the device itself [Reg. 16].
READING ANALOGUE VALUES
• Tamper voltage: displays the analogue voltage value of the 24H input.
• Input bus voltage: displays the voltage value at the input of the Bus isolator between terminals V+ and V- In. The typical voltage value must
fall between 10.3 Vdc and 14.5 Vdc.
• Output bus voltage: displays the voltage value at the output of the Bus isolator between terminals V+ and V- Out. The typical voltage value
must fall between 10.3 Vdc and 14.5 Vdc.
24
< BACK
< BACK
3.3 RADIO EXPANSIONS
This section is for configuring the parameters of the radio expansions.
Radio expansion are bus expansions for receiving and sending radio information, and managing wireless sirens and sensors. Each module can manage up
to 32 radio zones, up to 32 radio controls and up to 16 radio outputs (of which 8 can be sirens).
Radio expansions
Activate 1 Radio exp. 1
Absent
2 Radio exp. 2
Absent
3 Radio exp. 3
Area
Display technical alarms
ID Description
Display tamper
Status
Tamper alarm cycles
Unlimited
Cycles
0
Technical alarms cycles (bus / voltage levels)
Unlimited
Cycles
0
Send message options
Send detailed events SMS
Send Email messages
Send digital communication
Area 1
Send notification to App
Area 2
Area 3
Area 4
Area 5
Area 6
Area 7
Area 8
STATUS/DESCRIPTION PANEL
STATUS / ID / DESCRIPTION
See description Status / ID / Description on page 87.
AREAS PANEL
AREA
Column showing the names of the areas in the system. To edit names, see "3.6 Areas" on page 37
DISPLAY TAMPER
Allows you to choose to which areas the Tamper alarm generated by the device is sent.
the device are to be signalled must be assigned to each active device [Reg. 5]
At least one area to which the tamper alarms generated by
DISPLAY TECHNICAL ALARMS
Allows you to choose to which areas the technical alarms generated by the device are sent.
generated by the device are to be signalled must be assigned to each active device [Reg. 6]
At least one area to which the technical alarms
CONFIGURATIONS PANEL
TAMPER ALARM CYCLES
• Unlimited: allows you to generate infinite cycles of tamper alarms. If not selected, enables the Cycles box.
Selected [Reg. 12]
• Cycles: if the Unlimited checkbox is not active, this box determines the number of tamper alarm cycles that the selected device can generate
within an activation cycle (from one activation to the next).
TECHNICAL ALARMS CYCLES (BUS/VOLTAGE LEVELS)
• Unlimited: allows you to generate infinite cycles of technical alarms. If not selected, enables the Cycles box.
Selected [Reg. 13]
• Cycles: if the Unlimited checkbox is not active, this box determines the number of technical alarm cycles that the selected device can generate
within an activation cycle (from one activation to the next).
SEND MESSAGE OPTIONS
See description Send Message options on page. 89.
All active devices must permit the control panel to send notification to the digital communicator for events generated by the device itself [Reg. 16].
25
< BACK
< BACK
3.3.1 Radio outputs /sirens
This section is for configuring the parameters of the input/output expansions. These are bus expansions which provide 8 configurable inputs (or
open-collector outputs).
The total activation time of a siren must not exceed that prescribed by local regulations (see appendix to see what parameters determine
the total duration).
RADIO OUTPUT ACQUISITION
Prepare the peripheral as per the specific technical sheet. In the case of a radio siren, by way of a guideline, proceed as follows:
1. With the mouse, select the location to which you intend to save.
2. With the siren battery disconnected, press and hold the siren's LEARN button, which is located near the connection strip for the configuration
jumpers, and then connect the battery. Hold the LEARN button down until the siren flashing light starts flashing quickly, then release the button.
3. Wait until the flashing changes from quick to slow.
4. Click on the Acquire button (see "Radio output properties / acquire" page 27). Via the control panel, the program starts the procedure for
acquiring the output code and parameters, including type.
5. At the end of the procedure, the program indicates that acquisition has been completed and shows whether the code belongs to a siren or to a
radio output. If the procedure times out before acquisition has been completed, repeat the operation from the start.
DELETING A RADIO OUTPUT
1. With the mouse, select the location corresponding to the output to be removed.
2. Click on the Delete button (see "Radio output properties / delete" on page 27) and confirm. The program will indicate that deletion has been
completed.
Radio outputs / sirens
1 Radio output 1
116
Radio exp. 1
Absent
2 Radio output 2
117
Radio exp. 1
Absent
3 Radio output 3
118
Radio exp. 1
Absent
4 Radio output 4
119
Radio exp. 1
Absent
5 Radio output 5
120
Radio exp. 1
Absent
6 Radio output 6
121
Radio exp. 1
Absent
7 Radio output 7
122
Radio exp. 1
Absent
8 Radio output 8
123
Radio exp. 1
Absent
9 Radio output 9
124
Radio exp. 1
Absent 10 Radio output 10 125
Radio exp. 1
Absent 11 Radio output 11 126
Radio exp. 1
Absent 12 Radio output 12 127
Radio exp. 1
Absent 13 Radio output 13 128
Radio exp. 1
Absent 14 Radio output 14 129
Radio exp. 1
Absent 15 Radio output 15 130
Radio exp. 1
Absent 16 Radio output 16 131
Radio exp. 1
Area
Display tamper
Absent
ID Description
Display system status
Physical Id
Source expansion
Status
Radio output properties
Other options
Disable battery check
Serial Number
Siren
Type
Acquire
Delete
RSSI (received signal strength indication 0-100)
0
Read
Area 1
Area 2
Area 3
Area 4
Area 5
Area 6
Area 7
Area 8
Siren options
LED intermittence timeout Equal to siren timeou
Siren Volume
Medium-high
Activation timeout
2 minutes
Sound on siren start-up
Sound on activation/deactivation
LED activation on siren start-up
LED activation on activation/deactivation
LED enabled
Radio monitoring time (minutes)
3
Event 1
Event type
Areas
AND / OR
Event subtype
OR alarm
Areas
Event
Zone alarm
Polarity
Direct
OR
Area 1
Area 2
Area 3
Area 4
Area 5
Area 6
Area 7
Area 8
Event 2
Event type
System
Event subtype
OR alarm
Event
Sabotage
Polarity
Direct
Event 3
Event type
Event subtype
Event
Polarity
Direct
Event 4
Event type
Event subtype
Event
Polarity
Direct
Sabotage cycles
Events association
Unlimited
Events logic
OR
And timer
<None>
Or timer
Time
0
Malfunction alarm cycles
Unlimited
<None>
Time
0
Conduct
Output type
Monostable
Confirmations oscillation period 1
x 100 ms
Alarm oscillation period
x 100 ms
0
Monostable times
ON Time (seconds)
120
OFF Time (seconds)
0
Repetition cycles
Unlimited 1
Send message options
Send detailed events SMS
Send Email messages
Send digital communication
Send notification to App
STATUS/DESCRIPTION PANEL
STATUS / ID / DESCRIPTION
See description Status / ID / Description on page 87.
PHYSICAL ID
Uniquely identifies the output within the framework of the internal numbering of the control panel. Cannot be modified by the installer.
SOURCE EXPANSION
Provides a description of the radio module to which the output (or siren) is associated.
26
< BACK
< BACK
AREAS PANEL
AREA
Column showing the names of the areas in the system. To edit names, see "3.6 Areas" on page 37.
DISPLAY SYSTEM STATUS
Allows you to select the areas about which visual and/or aural activation/deactivation information can be sent.
To each active device must be
assigned at least one area to which information regarding optical and/or acoustic activation/deactivation can be sent [Reg. 23]
DISPLAY TAMPER
Allows you to choose to which areas the Tamper alarm generated by the device is sent.
the device are to be signalled must be assigned to each active device [Reg. 5]
At least one area to which the tamper alarms generated by
CONFIGURATIONS PANEL
RADIO OUTPUT PROPERTIES
• Serial number: the siren output serial number will appear the moment it is acquired.
• Type: drop-down menu; the moment the radio code from the peripheral is acquired, it allows you to establish whether the acquired code will
belong to a radio siren or to a radio output. This will ensure the acquisition of a correct code for the type of peripheral and will set, on the
control panel, the right method of communication with the peripheral.
• Acquire: for starting the code acquiring phase for the output corresponding to the selected position, by means of the radio expansion module
with which it is associated.
• Delete: deletes the code of the selected position, making it available again to be associated to another radio peripheral (output or siren).
OTHER OPTIONS
• Disable battery check: if this option is selected, the operational check procedure for the battery powering the siren will be disabled.
selected [Reg. 26]
NOT
RSSI (SIGNAL LEVEL INDICATOR 0-100)
RSSI is the power of the radio signal between the siren in use and the radio transmitter to which it is associated, where 0 is no signal and 100 is the
maximum value that can be obtained.
• Read: when this key is pressed the radio signal is read. The Minimum RSSI Acquisition value must be 40 RSSI.
SIREN OPTIONS
• LED intermittence timeout: for future uses.
• Siren volume: future uses.
• Timeout activation:for future uses.
• Sound on siren start-up: for future uses.
• Sound on activation/deactivation: for future uses.
• Led activation on siren start-up: for future uses.
• LED activation on activation/deactivation: for future uses.
• LED enabled: for future uses.
• Radio monitoring time (minutes): enables setting of a time period beyond which a fault signal is sent if the siren does not respond.
EVENT 1 / 2 / 3 / 4
See description on page 90.
EVENTS ASSOCIATION (AND/OR)
See description on page 90.
SABOTAGE CYCLES
• Unlimited: allows you to generate infinite cycles of sabotage alarms. If not selected, enables the Time box.
• Time: if the Unlimited checkbox is not active, this box determines the number of sabotage alarm cycles that the selected device can generate
within an activation cycle (from one activation to the next).
MALFUNCTION ALARM CYCLES
• Unlimited: allows you to generate infinite cycles of malfunction alarms. If not selected, enables the Time box.
• Time: if the Unlimited checkbox is not active, this box determines the number of malfunction alarm cycles that the selected device can generate
within an activation cycle (from one activation to the next).
BEHAVIOUR
See description on page 91.
SEND MESSAGE OPTIONS
See description Send Message options on page. 89.
All active devices must permit the control panel to send notification to the digital communicator for events generated by the device itself [Reg. 16].
27
< BACK
< BACK
3.3.2 Radio controls
This section can be used to add or remove and configure remote controls.
Radio controls
Description
Source expansion
1
Radio ctrl 1
Radio exp. 1
2
Radio ctrl 2
Radio exp. 1
3
Radio ctrl 3
Radio exp. 1
User
Checked areas
ID
Radio control properties
Serial Number
4 buttons
Type
Acquire
Area
Delete
4
Radio ctrl 4
Radio exp. 1
5
Radio ctrl 5
Radio exp. 1
6
Radio ctrl 6
Radio exp. 1
7
Radio ctrl 7
Radio exp. 1
8
Radio ctrl 8
Radio exp. 1
9
Radio ctrl 9
Radio exp. 1
Area 1
F1 key function (top left)
Scenario / Activat
Total deactivation
10
Radio ctrl 10
Radio exp. 1
Area 2
11
Radio ctrl 11
Radio exp. 1
Area 3
F2 key function (top right)
Scenario / Activat
Total activation
12
Radio ctrl 12
Radio exp. 1
Area 4
F3 key function (bottom left)
Scenario / Activat
Scenario P1
13
Radio ctrl 13
Radio exp. 1
Area 5
14
Radio ctrl 14
Radio exp. 1
Area 6
15
Radio ctrl 15
Radio exp. 1
Area 7
16
Radio ctrl 16
Radio exp. 1
Area 8
17
Radio ctrl 17
Radio exp. 1
18
Radio ctrl 18
Radio exp. 1
19
Radio ctrl 19
Radio exp. 1
20
Radio ctrl 20
Radio exp. 1
21
Radio ctrl 21
Radio exp. 1
22
Radio ctrl 22
Radio exp. 1
23
Radio ctrl 23
Radio exp. 1
24
Radio ctrl 24
Radio exp. 1
25
Radio ctrl 25
Radio exp. 1
26
Radio ctrl 26
Radio exp. 1
28
Radio ctrl 28
Radio exp. 1
29
Radio ctrl 29
Radio exp. 1
30
Radio ctrl 30
Radio exp. 1
32
Radio ctrl 32
RSSI (received signal strength indication 0-100)
0
Read
Key functions
F4 key function (bottom right) Alarm
Medical
Fault cycles
Unlimited
Cycles
0
Forced activation
Instant activation
Send message options
Send detailed events SMS
Send Email messages
Send digital communication
Send notification to App
Radio
exp. 1
27
Radio ctrl 27
STATUS/DESCRIPTION
PANEL
ID
Identifies the position of the radio control. An uneditable checkbox next to the ID parameter; shows when a position is occupied, i.e. when a code
Radio exp. 1
31
Radio ctrl 31
has already been acquired
in that position.
Radio exp. 1
DESCRIPTION
For entering a specific, customised name for the device. For example, you might choose to change the name of "Radio Control 1" to “RC John” so
as to give a more specific idea of its user.
SOURCE EXPANSION
Shows a description of the radio module with which the radio control is associated.
USER
Allows you to assign a user and hence the latter's authorisations to a radio control.
AREAS PANEL
CHECKED AREAS
Selects the areas that can be controlled by the device during normal operation.
operation must be assigned to each active device [Reg. 32]
At least one area on which the device can act during normal
AREA
Column showing the names of the areas in the system. To edit names, see "3.6 Areas" on page 37.
CONFIGURATIONS PANEL
RADIO CONTROL PROPERTIES
• Serial number: the radio control serial number will appear the moment it is acquired.
• Type: shows the type of radio control acquired (e.g.: 4 buttons, in the sense of a 4-button radio control).
• Acquire: starts radio control acquisition.
• Delete: deletes the selected radio control.
RSSI (SIGNAL LEVEL INDICATOR 0-100)
RSSI is the power of the radio signal between the radio control in use and the radio transmitter to which it is associated, where 0 is no signal and
100 is the maximum value that can be obtained.
• Read: when this key is pressed the radio signal is read. The Minimum RSSI Acquisition value must be 40 RSSI.
FUNCTION KEYS
See description Function keys on page 88.
FAULT CYCLES
• Unlimited: allows you to generate infinite cycles of fault alarms. If not selected, enables the Cycles box.
Selected [Reg. 33]
• Cycles: if the Unlimited checkbox is not active, this box determines the number of fault alarm cycles that the selected radio control can generate
within an activation cycle (from one activation to the next).
28
< BACK
< BACK
FORCED ACTIVATION
When the function is enabled, the Radio control will always carry out activation, forcing the activation lock conditions.
Selected [Reg. 34]
INSTANT ACTIVATION
If selected, the enabled areas will activate immediately, therefore resetting any output time to zero.
SEND MESSAGE OPTIONS
See description Send Message options on page. 89.
All active devices must permit the control panel to send notification to the digital communicator for events generated by the device itself [Reg. 16].
29
< BACK
< BACK
3.3.3 Radio zones
This section of the program is for managing the radio zones, which correspond to the IR and magnetic contact wireless sensors belonging to the
system. Specifically, you can acquire new sensor codes; isolate, exclude or delete sensors already present on the control panel, and modify the
parameters of each radio sensor.
RADIO SENSOR ACQUISITION
Prepare the peripheral as per the specific technical sheet. In the case of a radio sensor, by way of a guideline, proceed as follows:
1. With the mouse, select a free position in which to save the sensor.
2. Insert the battery in the sensor concerned and wait until the LED stops flashing. This applies to both magnetic contacts (REED) and infrared
detectors (PIR).
3. Click on the Acquire button; an on-screen message will inform you that the code acquisition procedure is in progress.
4. On the sensor, press and then release the tamper button.
5. A few seconds later, the control panel will confirm that the code has been acquired and will update the Serial Number and Type boxes with the
sensor data acquired.
Radio zones
Pir
ID Description
Physical Id
Radio zone properties
Status
Source expansion
Absent
1 Radio zone 1
267
Radio exp. 1
Absent
2 Radio zone 2
268
Radio exp. 1
Absent
3 Radio zone 3
269
Radio exp. 1
Absent
4 Radio zone 4
270
Radio exp. 1
Absent
5 Radio zone 5
271
Radio exp. 1
Absent
6 Radio zone 6
272
Radio exp. 1
Absent
7 Radio zone 7
273
Radio exp. 1
Absent
8 Radio zone 8
274
Radio exp. 1
Enabled
Absent
9 Radio zone 9
Tamper enabled
Serial Number
275
Radio exp. 1
Absent 10 Radio zone 10
276
Radio exp. 1
Absent 11 Radio zone 11
277
Radio exp. 1
Absent 12 Radio zone 12
278
Radio exp. 1
Absent 13 Radio zone 13
279
Radio exp. 1
Absent 14 Radio zone 14
280
Radio exp. 1
Absent 15 Radio zone 15
281
Radio exp. 1
Absent 16 Radio zone 16
282
Radio exp. 1
Absent 17 Radio zone 17
283
Radio exp. 1
Absent 18 Radio zone 18
284
Radio exp. 1
Absent 19 Radio zone 19
285
Radio exp. 1
Absent 20 Radio zone 20
286
Radio exp. 1
Absent 21 Radio zone 21
287
Radio exp. 1
Absent 22 Radio zone 22
288
Radio exp. 1
Absent 23 Radio zone 23
289
Radio exp. 1
Absent 24 Radio zone 24
290
Radio exp. 1
Absent 25 Radio zone 25
291
Radio exp. 1
Absent 26 Radio zone 26
292
Radio exp. 1
Absent 27 Radio zone 27
293
Radio exp. 1
Absent 28 Radio zone 28
294
Radio exp. 1
Absent
29 Radio zone 29
295
Radio exp. 1
Absent
30 Radio zone 30
296
Radio exp. 1
Absent
31 Radio zone 31
297
Radio exp. 1
Absent
32 Radio zone 32
298
Radio exp. 1
Smoke
Options
PIR
Type
Reed
Acquire
Delete
Gain control
Number of impulses
0
Read
2
Pet immunity
RSSI (received signal strength indication 0-100)
2 Impulses
Options
Radio monitoring time (minutes)
90
Enable APS
Fault cycles
Unlimited
Cycles
0
Zone
Type
Alarm
Subtype
Burglar
Areas associated with
zone
Area 1
Area 2
Area 3
Area 4
Areas logic
OR
Inactivity
No functio
Area 5
Area 6
Area 7
Area 8
Inactivity time (minutes) 1
Instant activation
Forced activation
Send message options
Send detailed events SMS
Send notification to App
Send Email messages
Send MMS
Send digital communication
Alarm cycles
Unlimited
Cycles 0
Cameras
Source
Camera
Groups in AND
Reaction type
Instant
Attributes
Excluded
Delayed input 1
Cannot Exclude
Delayed input 2
Chime
Input path
Test
Delayed in output
Auto-excludable
Last output
Auto-excludable with reset
Output delay with termination
Partial 1
Partial 2
Delayed on partial activation
Delayed and assess ready activation
Display during input/output
Burglar alarm verified
30
< BACK
< BACK
DUPLICATE THE VALUES OF THE CURRENT ZONE...
Button allowing the configurations of a zone to be copied so as to paste them onto an existing zone.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Select the zone of which you want to copy the configurations.
Press the
icon to copy.
Select the zone where you want to paste the configurations from the window "Duplicate current zone on zone..."
Confirm.
STATUS/DESCRIPTION PANEL
STATUS / ID / DESCRIPTION
See description Status / ID / Description on page 87.
PHYSICAL ID
Uniquely identifies the zone within the framework of the internal numbering of the control panel. Cannot be modified by the installer.
SOURCE EXPANSION
Shows a description of the radio module with which the radio zone is associated.
CONFIGURATIONS PANEL
RADIO ZONE PROPERTIES
• Serial number: the device serial number will appear the moment it is acquired.
• Type: the type of sensor acquired is shown the moment the radio code of the peripheral is acquired (e.g.: Reed for a contact transmitter or PIR
for a passive infrared detector).
• Acquire: for starting the code acquiring phase for the zone corresponding to the selected position, by means of the radio expansion module
with which it is associated.
• Delete: deletes the code of the selected position, making it available again to be associated with a new radio device.
RSSI (SIGNAL LEVEL INDICATOR 0-100)
RSSI is the power of the radio signal between the sensor in use and the radio transmitter to which it is associated, where 0 is no signal and 100 is
the maximum value that can be obtained.
• Read: when this key is pressed the radio signal is read. The Minimum RSSI Acquisition value must be 40 RSSI.
OPTIONS
• Radio monitor time (minutes): allows you to set the time lapse between two consecutive transmissions of the sensor “existence” frame. The
control panel will use these transmissions to assess the presence and correct operating status of the sensor.
In the event of repeated failure to receive these transmissions, the control panel is capable of generating an
anomaly or alarm. = 20 min [Reg. 35]
• LED enabled: if selected, enables the LED on the radio sensor.
• Tamper enabled: if selected, enables the tamper on the radio sensor.
Selected [Reg. 36]
• Enabling APS: (Automatic Power Saving) if selected, with the system off, allows the reduction of battery consumption (by reducing the number
of communications of the sensors with the radio concentrator).
FAULT CYCLES
• Unlimited: allows you to generate infinite cycles of fault alarms. If not selected, enables the Cycles box.
Selected [Reg. 33]
• Cycles: if the Unlimited checkbox is not active, this box determines the number of fault alarm cycles that the selected sensor can generate within
an activation cycle (from one activation to the next).
PIR (OPTIONS APPLY TO PIR SENSORS ONLY)
• Gain control: set the sensitivity value of the PIR from 1 (lowest value) to 4 (highest value).
• Pet immunity: if selected, activates the Pet Immunity function (to allow the presence of small animals).
• Number of pulses: allows you to set the number of pulses.
REED (OPTIONS APPLY TO REED SENSORS ONLY)
• Switch in AND: if selected, the alarm will be generated only if both inputs are open.
• External switch: if selected, the input for the sensor terminal block will be considered to be in use.
• Internal switch: if selected, the internal input, corresponding to the reed capsule in the sensor, will be considered to be in use.
SMOKE
• Smoke sensor: if selected, enables the respective sensor.
• Heat sensor: if selected, enables the respective sensor.
31
< BACK
< BACK
ZONE
This section is for configuring the basic behaviour of the zone. In particular, you can associate the type of operation to the zone.
• Type / subtype: selects the type of zone from four possibilities: Alarm, Command, Sabotage, Fault Once you have made your selection, the
field below (subtype) will show a series of possible choices, depending on the type of selection made (See page 94).
There must be a zone configured as Type: fault - Subtype: zone fault [Reg. 1]. There must be a zone configured as Type: fault Subtype: robbery fault [Reg. 2]. There must be a zone configured as Type: fault - Subtype: siren fault [Reg. 3]. All alarm, fault and
command zones must be set to double or triple balance or double with EOL. The sabotage zones must be set to single or double or
triple or triple with jamming or double with EOL [Reg. 4]
• Areas associated with zone: determines which areas the zone will be associated with.
area. [Reg. 37]
All active devices must have at least one associated
• Areas Logic:
• OR: the selected actions are performed if the conditions arise in any of the areas associated with the zone.
• AND: the set actions are performed only if the conditions arise in all of the areas associated with the zone.
• Inactivity: allows an action to be generated if a zone remains inactive beyond a maximum time limit.
• No function: no action is performed.
• Fault: an alarm fault is generated.
• Auto-activation: the alarm for the area associated to the zone is activated.
• Inactivity time (minutes): field for setting the maximum inactivity time.
• Instant activation: if selected, the zone command instantly activates the areas to which it is associated.
• Forced activation: if selected, the zone command or inactivity activates the areas to which it is associated, forcing the activation lock conditions.
• Send message options: See description Send Message options on page. 89.
• Alarm cycles
• Unlimited: allows you to generate infinite alarm cycles. If not selected, enables the Cycles box.
Selected [Reg. 40]
• Cycles: if the Unlimited checkbox is not active, this box determines the number of alarm cycles that the zone can generate within an
activation cycle (from one activation to the next).
• Cameras: This section is for setting a camera to start acquiring the frames upon violation of the zone. The frames obtained can be sent by MMS
and e-mail or notified to the Vedo App.
• Source: drop-down menu; allows you to choose the PAL/IP module to which the camera to be used for shooting the frames
is connected.
• Camera: drop-down menu; allows you to choose the camera that will shoot the frames, from those connected to the PAL/
IP device.
• Groups in AND (only for zone type: Alarm): The Groups in AND are eight virtual zones which can be constructed on the basis of the real
zones, whether radio or wired. The aim of such a function is to cause the generation of an event,
e.g. an alarm, conditional upon the violation of more than one area. For this purpose, there is a
drop-down menu from which you can associate the zone with any of these eight areas. You need
to associate more than one zone to a Group in AND in order to obtain the expected result. For the
behaviour of Groups in AND, (see "3.5 Groups in AND" on page 36).
• Reaction type (only for zone type: Alarm/Burglary): See description of reaction type on page 95.
• Attributes (only for zone type: Alarm): See attributes description on page 96.
• Command type: See description of command type on page 96.
32
< BACK
< BACK
3.4 WIRED ZONES
This section of the program is for managing the wired zones, which correspond to the wired sensors belonging to the system. Specifically, you can add new
zones; isolate, exclude or delete zones already present on the control panel, and modify the parameters of each zone.
Wired zones
Double zone
description
Terminals
Zone description
Double
Origin
Double Id
Expansion type
Zone Id
Status
Double
Balancing
Fault/tampering/shortcircuit cycles
Unlimited
Cycles 0
Activate Central unit
Central unit
1 24H zone
2 24H double zone
24H
Activate Central unit
Central unit
3 Wired zone 1
4 Double zone 1D
I1
Activatet Central unit
Central unit
5 Wired zone 2
6 Double zone 2D
I2
0
- 1.14
Sabotage / Short
Activate Central unit
Central unit
7 Wired zone 3
8 Double zone 3D
I3
1.14
- 2.65
Rest
Activate Central unit
Central unit
9 Wired zone 4
10 Double zone 4D
I4
Activate Central unit
Central unit
11 Wired zone 5
12 Double zone 5D
I5
2.65
- 4.33
Alarm
Activate Central unit
Central unit
13 Wired zone 6
14 Double zone 6D
I6
4.33
- 5.97
Sabotage / Open
Activate Central unit
Central unit
15 Wired zone 7
16 Double zone 7D
I7
5.97
- 8.13
Sabotage / Open
Activate Central unit
Central unit
17 Wired zone 8
18 Double zone 8D
I8
8.13
- 9.4
Sabotage / Open
Absent
Speed
Keypad 1
211 Keypad 1 I1
212 Keyp 1 I1D
I1
Absent
Speed
Keypad 1
214 Keypad 1 I2
214 Keyp 1 I2D
I2
Setpoints (KΩ)
Analogue value reading (KΩ)
Reset
0
Reset
Zone
Double
Zone ID
1
Type
Alarm
Subtype
24H
Areas associated with
zone
Area 1
Area 2
Area 3
Area 4
Areas logic
OR
Inactivity
No functio
Area 5
Area 6
Area 7
Area 8
Inactivity time (minutes) 1
Detection type
Standard zone
Impulse acquisition time
30
Seconds
Alarm impulse duration
1
x 100 ms
Impulses
1
Instant activation
Forced activation
Send message options
Send detailed events SMS
Send notification to App
Send Email messages
Send MMS
Send digital communication
Alarm cycles
Unlimited
Cycles 0
Cameras
Source
Camera
Groups in AND
Reaction type
Instant
Attributes
Excluded
Delayed input 1
Cannot Exclude
Delayed input 2
Chime
Input path
Test
Delayed in output
Auto-excludable
Last output
Auto-excludable with reset
Output delay with termination
Partial 1
Partial 2
Enable output delay on partial activation
Delayed and assess ready activation
Display during input/output
Burglar alarm verified
DUPLICATE THE VALUES OF THE CURRENT ZONE...
Button allowing the configurations of a zone to be copied so as to paste them onto an existing zone.
1.
2.
3.
4.
33
Select the zone of which you want to copy the configurations.
Press the
icon to copy.
Select the zone where you want to paste the configurations from the window "Duplicate current zone on zone..."
Confirm.
< BACK
< BACK
STATUS/DESCRIPTION PANEL
STATUS
Drop-down menu, allows you to add, isolate and remove devices from the configuration. The possible statuses for the device are as follows:
• Absent: when the zone does not exist or has to be removed.
• Active: when the zone is present, configured and intended to be operational.
• Isolated: when the zone is intended to be temporarily unused (even if present and configured, the control panel will not consider it active).
EXPANSION TYPE
Describes the type of peripheral to which the zone is connected, for example “Central unit” or “Keypad”.
ORIGIN
Describes to which peripheral the zone is connected, for example “Keypad 1”, for the purpose of precisely identifying the zone connection position.
ZONE ID
Uniquely identifies the zone
ZONE DESCRIPTION / DOUBLE ZONE
n editable, alphanumeric field, in which you can enter a specific, customised name for the zone / double zone. For example, you might want to
A
change “Wired zone 1” to “Entrance 1” for the purpose of rapid identification of the physical position or function of the zone.
DOUBLE ID
Uniquely identifies the double zone.
TERMINAL
Shows the name for the physical terminal of the peripheral to which the output in question is routed.
DOUBLE
Flag; appears when the type Double or Double with EOL is selected in the tab for the zone.
CONFIGURATIONS PANEL
BALANCING
INPUT TYPE
DESCRIPTION
NO
Normally Open in standby, signals only the alarm
NC
Normally closed in standby, signals only the alarm
Single
Double
Triple
Triple with jamming
Double
Double with EOL
Single balance. Signals alarm and sabotage by short-circuit of the physical line
Double balance, signals alarm and sabotage by cutting or short-circuit of the physical line
Triple balance. Signals alarm, fault and sabotage by cutting or short-circuit of the physical line
From version 2.4, the zone fault recognition time for triple balance has been reduced from 10 seconds to 2 seconds.
Triple balance with jamming. Signals an alarm, motion sensor jamming and sabotage due to cutting or short-circuit of the physical line (from version 2.4, the
zone fault recognition time for triple balance with jamming has been reduced from 10 seconds to 2 seconds)
Enables you to connect two sensors to a single wired line. Signals alarm from zone 1, alarm from zone Double 1 and sabotage due to cutting of the cable
As for Double but with end-of-line resistor. Enables you to connect two sensors to a single wired line and to signal tampering with the line. Signals alarm
from zone 1, alarm from zone Double 1 and sabotage due to cutting or short-circuit of the physical line
All the alarm, fault and control zones must be at least in double balance. Single balance may be enough for sabotage [Reg. 4]
For a physical description of the wiring required for correct balancing of the zones associated with each type of balance, refer to the control panel
technical installation manual.
FAULT / TAMPERING / SHORTCIRCUIT CYCLES
• Unlimited: allows you to generate infinite cycles of fault / tampering / shortcircuit alarms. If not selected, enables the Cycles box.
• Cycles: if the Unlimited checkbox is not active, this box determines the number of fault / tampering / shortcircuit alarm cycles that the selected
sensor can generate within an activation cycle (from one activation to the next).
SETPOINTS
his section shows the trigger setpoints set on the control panel for the selected zone. If you change the type of balance in the Balance drop-down
T
menu, the meaning of the voltage ranges changes. In the simplest case (NC or NO) there are only two possibilities: Standby and Alarm. In the case
of a more complex configuration, for example Double with EOL meanings will be added to several voltage ranges previously associated with the
Alarm and Standby states. You can modify each individual setpoint to compensate an imbalance of the line. You are advised to modify the setpoints
only after careful consideration.
• Reset: clicking this button resets the setpoints to their factory settings, thereby deleting any change relating to the selected zone.
ZONE / DOUBLE
This section is for configuring the basic behaviour of the zone. In particular, you can associate the type of operation to the zone.
When you select Double or Double with EOL as the input type, you can use both tabs (Zone/Double). Otherwise, only the Zone tab will be usable.
34
< BACK
< BACK
• Zone ID: uniquely identifies the wired zone.
• Type / subtype: selects the type of zone from four possibilities: Alarm, Command, Sabotage, Fault Once you have made your selection, the
field below (subtype) will show a series of possible choices, depending on the type of selection made (See page 94).
There must be a zone configured as Type: fault - Subtype: zone fault [Reg. 1]. There must be a zone configured as Type: fault Subtype: robbery fault [Reg. 2]. There must be a zone configured as Type: fault - Subtype: siren fault [Reg. 3]. All alarm, fault and
command zones must be set to double or triple balance or double with EOL. The sabotage zones must be set to single or double or
triple or triple with jamming or double with EOL [Reg. 4]
• Areas associated with zone: determines which areas the zone will be associated with.
area. [Reg. 37]
All active devices must have at least one associated
• Areas Logic:
• OR: the selected actions are performed if the conditions arise in any of the areas associated with the zone.
• AND: the set actions are performed only if the conditions arise in all of the areas associated with the zone.
• Inactivity: allows an action to be generated if a zone remains inactive beyond a maximum time limit.
• No function: no action is performed.
• Fault: an alarm fault is generated.
• Auto-activation: the alarm for the area associated to the zone is activated.
• Inactivity time (minutes): field for setting the maximum inactivity time.
• Detection type: drop-down menu. In order to interpret status changes correctly, you can configure the zone as a standard zone or as Inertial /
Shutter, with different parameters. In both cases, you can configure the zone in such a way that it triggers only after a certain
number of pulses (of zone violation) within a certain time. You can also set the minimum amplitude of the pulses that will be
considered.
• Pulse acquisition time, Alarm Pulse Duration: only if, within the "Pulse acquisition time", the number of pulses detected is greater than
or equal to the number set in the "Pulse" box, and their minimum amplitude satisfies the
parameter "Alarm pulse duration", will the zone be considered to have been violated (or
activated if a Control Zone).
PARAMETER
UNIT OF MEASUREMENT FOR NORMAL DETECTION
UNIT OF MEASUREMENT FOR INERTIAL/ROLLER SHUTTER
DETECTION
Pulse acquisition time
125 seconds maximum or
125 minutes maximum
125 seconds maximum or
125 minutes maximum
Alarm impulse duration
12.7 seconds maximum or
127 minutes maximum
127 x 1 millisecond maximum or
127 x 10 milliseconds maximum
10 maximum
10 maximum
Pulses
• Instant activation: if selected, the zone command instantly activates the areas to which it is associated.
• Forced activation: if selected, the zone command or inactivity activates the areas to which it is associated, forcing the activation lock conditions.
• Send message options: See description Send Message options on page. 89.
• Alarm cycles
• Unlimited: allows the zone to generate infinite alarm cycles. If not selected, enables the Cycles box.
Selected [Reg. 40]
• Cycles: if the Unlimited checkbox is not active, this box determines the number of alarm cycles that the zone can generate within an
activation cycle (from one activation to the next).
• Cameras: This section is for setting a camera to start acquiring the frames upon violation of the zone. The frames obtained can be sent by MMS
and e-mail or notified to the Vedo App.
• Source: drop-down menu; allows you to choose the PAL/IP module to which the camera to be used for shooting the frames
is connected.
• Camera: drop-down menu; allows you to choose the camera that will shoot the frames, from those connected to the PAL/
IP device.
• Groups in AND (only for zone type: Alarm): The Groups in AND are eight virtual zones which can be constructed on the basis of the real
zones, whether radio or wired. The aim of such a function is to cause the generation of an event,
e.g. an alarm, conditional upon the violation of more than one area. For this purpose, there is a
drop-down menu from which you can associate the zone with any of these eight areas. You need
to associate more than one zone to a Group in AND in order to obtain the expected result. For the
behaviour of Groups in AND, (see "3.5 Groups in AND" on page 36).
• Reaction type (only for zone type: Alarm/Burglary): See description of reaction type on page 95.
• Attributes (only for zone type: Alarm): See attributes description on page 96.
• Command type: See description of command type on page 96.
35
< BACK
< BACK
3.5 GROUPS IN AND
The control panel has 8 virtual zones whose behaviour depends on groups of real zones, which are assigned at the configuration stage to one of the 8
zones in AND.
When 2 or more zones are assigned to a zone in AND, all of them have to be violated within a specific time limit (measured from the first violation) for an
alarm state to be generated. The alarm state enables each real zone to generate an alarm according to its configuration.
Groups in AND
1
Group in AND 1
Time
window
(hh:mm:ss)
ID
Description
Zone Type
Expansion type
Double
Description
ID
00:00:00
2
Group in AND 2
00:00:00
3
Group in AND 3
00:00:00
4
Group in AND 4
00:00:00
5
Group in AND 5
00:00:00
6
Group in AND 6
00:00:00
7
Group in AND 7
00:00:00
8
Group in AND 8
00:00:00
STATUS/DESCRIPTION PANEL
ID
Uniquely identifies the virtual zone.
DESCRIPTION
An editable, alphanumeric field, in which you can enter a specific, customised name for the group. For example, you might want to change “Zone in
AND 1” to “Corridor Group” for the purpose of rapid identification of the function of the output.
TIME WINDOW
An editable, numerical box; determines the time within which the individual zones associated with the Zone in AND must be violated for an alarm
state to be generated.
ZONES IN AND DESCRIPTION PANEL
If you select with the mouse a position relating to a zone in AND to which real zones are associated, the field on the right-hand side will display
information about the individual associated real zones. The data are not editable
ID
Uniquely identifies a real zone associated with the zone in AND.
DESCRIPTION
Shows the description set for the real zone at the time of its configuration.
ZONE TYPE
Describes the type of real zone (e.g.: Wired Zone or Radio Zone).
EXPANSION TYPE
Describes the module to which the real zone is connected.
DOUBLE
Checkbox; if shown selected, it means that the zone is double type.
36
< BACK
< BACK
3.6 AREAS
The Areas section allows you to configure the times and functions of the Areas according to the requirements of the system.
Areas
Area code
Auto-reset alarms
Enable deactivation timer
Enable activation timer
Activation delay after alarm (minutes)
Burglar alarm delay (seconds)
Round time (minutes)
Pre-alert time - activation (minutes)
Negligence
Not activated alert (minutes)
Last output time (mm:ss)
Output time (mm:ss)
Input 2 time (mm:ss)
Input 1 time (mm:ss)
Deactivation with alarm memory
Report pre-alert
Description
1
2
Area 1
Area 2
00:30
00:30
00:00 00:30 00:15
00:00 00:30 00:15
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
<None>
<None>
<None>
<None>
0
0
4
5
Area 4
Area 5
00:30
00:30
00:00 00:30 00:15
00:00 00:30 00:15
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
<None>
<None>
<None>
<None>
0
0
7
Area 7
00:30
00:00 00:30 00:15
0
0
0
0
0
<None>
<None>
0
3
6
Area 3
00:30
Area 6
00:30
8 Area 8
AREAS PANEL
00:30
00:00 00:30 00:15
00:00 00:30 00:15
00:00 00:30 00:15
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
<None>
<None>
<None>
<None>
<None>
<None>
0
0
0
ID
Uniquely identifies the area.
DESCRIPTION
For entering a specific, customised name for the area. For example, you might want to change “Area 1” to “Reception Area” for the purpose of rapidly
identifying the associated functions and sensors.
REPORT PRE-ALERT
If selected, allows you to signal the activation pre-alert time by means of the buzzers on the control devices associated with the selected area.
Selected [Reg. 50]
DEACTIVATION WITH ALARM MEMORY
If the area is enabled by a timer for the deactivation function, selecting this checkbox allows the area to be deactivated if it has saved an alarm.
Areas in AND
Area 1
Area 5
Quick activation of the areas in AND
INPUT 1 TIME (MM:SS) Area 2
Area 6
Quick activation of the areas in AND (forced)
Area
3
Area
This Timer allows a
Delayed
Input 1 time
to7be set for each individual Area. During Input time 1 (Timer active), the zones with Reaction type: Delayed
Area 4
Area 8
Input 1 and Input Path are not in a condition to send the area into alarm. The Input delay is the time which passes on violation of a Delayed Input or
Input Path type zone in the Area activated in Total or Partial mode. < 45 sec (00:45) [Reg. 46]
INPUT 2 TIME (MM:SS)
This Timer allows a Delayed Input 2 time to be set for each individual Area. During Input time 2 (Timer active), the zones with Reaction type: Delayed
Input 2 and Input Path are not in a condition to send the area into alarm. The Input delay is the time which passes on violation of a Delayed Input or
Input Path type zone in the Area activated in Total or Partial mode. < 45 sec (00:45) [Reg. 47]
OUTPUT TIME (MM:SS)
This Timer allows a Delayed Output time to be set for each individual Area. During Output time (Timer active), the zones with Reaction type: Delayed
Output are not in a condition to send the area into alarm. The Output delay is the time which passes on violation of a zone with Reaction type:
Delayed in Output. When the Output Time has elapsed the zones behave as per Reaction type programming.
LAST OUTPUT TIME (MM:SS)
The Last output time Timer replaces the value remaining for the Area Output Time on violation of a zone with Reaction type: Last output.
NOT ACTIVATED ALERT (MINUTES)
This Timer is used to check that the Area to which it corresponds is activated normally within a maximum time limit. If the Area is not activated for a
specified maximum time limit, an event of the type Areas/Generic/Negligence is generated and may be shown at an output. The maximum time that
can be configured is 60000.
PRE-ALERT TIME - ACTIVATION (MINUTES)
This Timer is used to alert personnel within the Checked area that activation is taking place. The enabled checking devices will emit an audible alert.
> 0 min [Reg. 48]
PATROL TIME (MINUTES)
The Patrol time Timer is the time that passes from the moment at which the Area is deactivated with a User type code: Patrol, the moment at which
it is activated automatically. The Patrol User type can be assigned to a User code, Proximity key or Radio control.
37
< BACK
< BACK
BURGLAR ALARM DELAY (SECONDS)
The "pre-alarm" Burglar alarm delay Timer is the time that passes between zone violation and Alarm event generation. During the Burglar alarm
delay, the enabled checking devices will emit an audible alert. = 0 sec [Reg. 49]
ACTIVATION DELAY AFTER ALARM (MINUTES)
The Activation delay after alarm is the time that must pass before the violated area which generated the alarm event can be activated again.
ENABLE ACTIVATION TIMER
If the Enable activation timer is associated with an Area, and if the Timer is active and in its START phase, the activation requirements for the area
- originating from the Control devices - will be satisfied. If the Timer is active but in is STOP phase, the activation requests will NOT be satisfied.
ENABLE DEACTIVATION TIMER
If the Enable deactivation timer is associated with an Area, and if the Timer is active and in its START phase, the deactivation requirements for
the area - originating from the Control devices - will be satisfied. If the Timer is active but in is STOP phase, the deactivation requests will NOT be
satisfied.
AUTO-RESET ALARMS
When this function is enabled, every Area to be activated will automatically carry out an Alarm Signal Reset.
AREA CODE
Allows you to enter a specific area code that will be digitally transmitted by the communicator if the zones associated with that area generate
alarms or events requiring notification to a monitoring control panel. It is useful when systems are shared between multiple users, because in these
circumstances the Customer Code is not sufficient to identify unequivocally the source of the alarm call.
AREAS IN AND PANEL:
AREAS IN AND
Allows you to associate the activation of the area that you are configuring, with the activation of one or more other areas. Supposing you are working
on Area 8, if you select Area 1 and Area 2 in its group of checkboxes, Area 8 will activate automatically when Area 1 and Area 2 are both activated.
It is possible to select one area only, for example Area 1. In this case, simply activating Area 1 will also activate Area 8.
INSTANT ACTIVATION OF AREAS IN AND
If selected, ignores the activation delays of the areas activated as a consequence of the areas in AND.
FORCED ACTIVATION OF AREAS IN AND
Checkbox, allows activation as a consequence of the areas in AND even in the presence of a 'not ready for activation' state. In the case of a zone
not ready for activation, if this cannot be excluded, it generates an alarm.
38
< BACK
< BACK
3.7 OUTPUTS
This section is for configuring the physical outputs present on the control panel or made available by the expansion modules on the bus.
The total activation time of any siren connected to an output must not exceed that prescribed by local regulations (see appendix to see
what parameters determine the total duration).
Outputs
Expansion
type
Terminal
Description
Output Id
Expansion Id
Status
Activate
1 O. centr.unit 1
Central unit
1 RLY
Activate
1 O. centr.unit 2
Central unit
2 TC1
Activate
1 O. centr.unit 3
Central unit
Absent
1 Safet 1 RLY
Safetouch
3 TC2
103 RLY
Event 1
Event type
Areas
AND / OR
Event subtype
OR alarm
Areas
Event
Zone alarm
Polarity
Direct
OR
Area 1
Area 2
Area 3
Area 4
Area 5
Area 6
Area 7
Area 8
Event 2
Event type
System
Event subtype
OR alarm
Event
Sabotage
Polarity
Direct
Event 3
Event type
Event subtype
Event
Polarity
Direct
Event 4
Event type
Event subtype
Event
Polarity
Direct
Events association
Events logic
OR
And timer
<None>
Or timer
<None>
Conduct
Output type
Monostable
Polarity
NO
Activation only with system activated
Oscillation semiperiod
0
Monostable times
ON Time
3
OFF Time
0
Repetition cycles
Unlimited
Minutes
1
Send message options
Send detailed events SMS
Send Email messages
Send digital communication
Send notification to App
STATUS/DESCRIPTION PANEL
STATUS
Drop-down menu, allows you to add, isolate and remove devices (Keypad, Safetouch...)/zones/outputs from the configuration.
The possible statuses for the device are as follows:
• Absent: when the device/zone/output does not exist or has to be removed.
• Active: when the device/zone/output is present, configured and intended to be operational.
• Isolated: when the device/zone/output is intended to be temporarily unused (even if present and configured, the control panel will not consider
it active).
EXPANSION ID
Shows the number of the expansion to which the output is routed. Coincides with the bus address configured on the peripheral.
DESCRIPTION
For entering a specific, customised name for the device. For example, you might want to change “Central Unit 1” to “General Alarm” for the purpose
of rapid identification of the function of the output.
39
< BACK
< BACK
EXPANSION TYPE
Shows the physical location of the output, with information such as “Central unit” or “8 I/O Expansion”.
OUTPUT ID
Uniquely identifies the output.
TERMINAL
Shows the name for the terminal of the peripheral to which the output in question is routed.
CONFIGURATIONS PANEL
EVENT 1 / 2 / 3 / 4
See description on page 90.
EVENTS ASSOCIATION (AND/OR)
See description on page 90.
BEHAVIOUR
See description on page 91.
SEND MESSAGE OPTIONS
See description Send Message options on page. 89.
All active devices must permit the control panel to send notification to the digital communicator for events generated by the device itself [Reg. 16].
40
< BACK
< BACK
3.8 EVENTS GROUP
The outputs, both standard outputs and radio outputs, can manage up to four events each, freely selected in terms of type and polarity. It is sometimes
useful to have indications grouped according to a logic that cannot be obtained by configuring the four events available for a single output, e.g. a summary
indication of block events relating to all the RFID readers, when there are more than 4 of them in the system.
The Group section provides eight Groups. Each group makes it possible to manage up to sixteen independent events.
The single events belonging to an event group can be managed in OR or in AND. The mode can be selected directly in the output menus, in the section for
assigning events to outputs. You can choose the two modes from an appropriate drop-down menu. See also Radio outputs / Sirens and Outputs.
Once you have decided and configured the events to be associated to the group, you can retrieve them in the section relating to Outputs or Radio Outputs.
You can do this by selecting the Groups option as Events Type in one of the four events available for the output and, immediately afterwards, from the menu
to the right of the event, selecting the Group configured to show the desired set of events.
Events group
ID
Description
Event 1
1
Events group 1
Event type
2
Events group 2
3
Events group 3
4
Events group 4
Event
5
Events group 5
Polarity
6
Events group 6
7
Events group 7
Event 2
8
Events group 8
Event type
Event subtype
Direct
Event subtype
Event
Polarity
Direct
Event 3
Event type
Event subtype
Event
Polarity
Direct
Event 4
Event type
Event subtype
Event
Polarity
Direct
Event 5
Event type
Event subtype
Event
Polarity
Direct
STATUS/DESCRIPTION PANEL
ID
Uniquely identifies the events group.
DESCRIPTION
n editable, alphanumeric field, in which you can enter a specific, customised name for the selected events group. For example, you might want to
A
change “Events Group 1” to “RFID Block” for rapid identification of the function assigned to the events group.
CONFIGURATIONS PANEL
EVENT 1 / 2 / 3 / 4 /... / 16
See description on page 90.
41
< BACK
< BACK
3.9 SCENARIOS
In this section you can configure the activation statuses for each area of the system and for 8 (for Vedo 10, Vedo 34) or 16 (for Vedo 68) different scenarios.
Scenarios
Description
Area
1
ID
Scenario P1
Area 1
Action
P1
2
Scenario P2
Area 2
P1
3
Scenario P1+P2
Area 3
P1
4
Scenario 4
Area 4
P1
5
Scenario 5
Area 5
P1
6
Scenario 6
Area 6
P1
7
Scenario 7
Area 7
P1
8
Scenario 8
Area 8
P1
9
Scenario 9
10 Scenario 10
11 Scenario 11
12 Scenario 12
13 Scenario 13
14 Scenario 14
15 Scenario 15
16 Scenario 16
STATUS/DESCRIPTION PANEL
ID
Uniquely identifies the scenario.
DESCRIPTION
n editable, alphanumeric field, in which you can enter a specific, customised name for the selected scenario. For example: you might want to
A
change “Scenario 4” to “Night-time” for rapid identification of the function assigned to the scenario. For each scenario there is a table in which to
configure the possible statuses of the area when that scenario is activated.
AREA / ACTION PANEL
AREA
n alphanumeric field; shows the name of the area (Area n by default) or the name that will be assigned to it by modifying the default in the Areas
A
section.
ACTION
Drop-down menu, allows you to associate a specific activation status to each area. For each area, the options described in the table on page 89.
42
< BACK
< BACK
3.10 CODES
This heading covers the sections for the configuration, programming and acquisition of the codes, divided by type.
The number of codes, keys and remote controls that can be activated depends on the type of control panel used:
VEDO10
VEDO34
VEDO34M
VEDO68
VEDO68M
User Code
8
32
32
50
50
Installer Code
2
5
5
5
5
1
Manufacturer Code
Remote controls
11
38
38
56
56
Keys
11
38
38
56
56
The codes accepted must have 6 figures and range from 000000 to 999998. Code 999999 is not an accepted code. The robbery code is the user code + 1.
Examples: user code 111111, the corresponding robbery code is 111112. Code 119999, robbery code = 120000. Code 123459, robbery code = 123460
It is not possible to register a user code corresponding to an existing user code + 1, since this new code corresponds to the robbery code of the existing user.
In the system it is therefore possible to store up to a theoretical maximum of 999943 user codes. The calculation is the result of the fact that it is not possible
to create a user code that is the same as an existing user code + 1 (which is the robbery code). The actual maximum number of user codes that can be
configured is shown in the previous table.
The authorised user can perform an infinite number of changes of his user code and can create and eliminate another user, whereas he is unable to modify
any user code other than his own.
IMPORTANT: if a user authorised to generate Robbery alarms types in a code identical to his own +1, a Robbery alarm will be generated.
For this reason, it is not possible to enter codes whose value is equal to an existing code plus or minus 1.
For digital keys, a unique key ID is used which has at least 2³²-2 combinations.
The unique ID of the digital key is defined by the crc32 of the bytes that form the unique code of the key, and can have a value between 1 and 2^32-1,
therefore generating a maximum number of 2^32-2 possible values.
The number of code entry errors that will cause the timed lockout of the control device is programmable from the System Parameters (see "3.14 System
Parameters" on page 70).
If the option "Default codes change mandatory" is enabled in the "System Parameters" page (see "3.14 System Parameters" on page
70): The system is "not ready" for activation until the user codes and installer codes are the same as those set as default (user: 111111,
master: 001961). The control panel will only start working once the user and master codes have been customised (at which point it will
also be possible to carry out activations).
MODIFYING USER/INSTALLER CODES
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
On the User/Installer page, select the position whose user/installer code you want to delete.
Click the Reset button.
When asked if you want to delete the existing code, press YES.
When asked for an authorisation code, type in an installer code or the code of a user authorised to perform the operation and then press OK.
When prompted for the new code, enter the six digits of the code that you intend to save, and press OK.
DELETING USER/INSTALLER CODES
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
43
Select the position whose user/installer code you want to delete.
Click the Delete button.
When asked if you want to delete the existing code, press YES.
When asked for an authorisation code, type in an installer code or the code of a user authorised to perform the operation and then press OK.
The program will confirm that the user code has been deleted.
Press OK to finish.
< BACK
< BACK
3.10.1 Users
There must be at least one active user [Reg. 53]
The users section is for the management of codes reserved for users, who therefore have the possibility of activating and deactivating the system,
depending on their authorisations.
Users
User name
User type
User 1
User 4 Type
2
User 2
User 1 Type
3
User 3
User 1 Type
4
User 4
User 1 Type
5
User 5
User 1 Type
6
User 6
User 1 Type
7
User 7
User 1 Type
8
User 8
User 1 Type
9
User 9
User 1 Type
10
User 10
User 1 Type
11
User 11
User 1 Type
12
User 12
User 1 Type
13
User 13
User 1 Type
14
User 14
User 1 Type
15
User 15
User 1 Type
16
User 16
User 1 Type
17
User 17
User 1 Type
18
User 18
User 1 Type
19
User 19
User 1 Type
20
User 20
User 1 Type
21
User 21
User 1 Type
22
User 22
User 1 Type
23
User 23
User 1 Type
24
User 24
User 1 Type
25
User 25
User 1 Type
26
User 26
User 1 Type
27
User 27
User 1 Type
28
User 28
User 1 Type
29
User 29
User 1 Type
30
User 30
User 1 Type
31
User 31
User 1 Type
32
User 32
User 1 Type
33
User 33
User 1 Type
34
User 34
User 1 Type
35
User 35
User 1 Type
Area
Enable
ID
1
Reset code
Delete
ID Passwords associated with user
Area 1
Area 2
Area 3
Area 4
ID Radio controls associated with user
Area 5
Area 6
Area 7
Area 8
Associated timer
<None>
Number of operations
Unlimited
0
Enablements
Keypads / readers
Keypads Safetouch Touch devices
Keypad 1
Keypad 2
Keypad 3
Keypad 4
PSTN (voice menu)
RFID readers
Keypad 5
Keypad 6
Keypad 7
Keypad 8
Use App
Access via web
USB
GSM (voice menu - sms commands)
Domotics
Robbery code
Disable activation with areas in alarm
Send message options
Send detailed events SMS
Send Email messages
Send digital communication
Send notification to App
STATUS/DESCRIPTION PANEL
ID
Uniquely identifies the user code. The tick in the checkbox at the side indicates that a user code has already been defined.
By default the "User 1" code is 111111
USER NAME
An editable, alphanumeric field; allows you to assign a name or description to the selected code. For example you might want to change “User 1” to
“John Smith” to clearly identify the real associated user.
USER TYPE
Drop-down menu, allows you to associate an authorisation level to a user code, according to the associated user type. The custom authorisations
of the various types of user can be modified in the Access levels section (see "3.10.3 Access levels" on page 47).
The possible choices for user type are:
• User Type 1: has the access levels authorised for User Type 1
• User Type 2: has the access levels authorised for User Type 2.
• User Type 3: has the access levels authorised for User Type 3
• User Type 4: has the access levels authorised for User Type 4
• Patrol: has the access levels authorised for Patrol Type.
• Master: has the access levels authorised for Master Type.
44
< BACK
< BACK
AREAS PANEL
AREA
An alphanumeric field; shows the name of the area (Area n by default) or the name that will be assigned to it by modifying the default in the Areas
section.
ENABLE
Checkboxes; if selected, enable the user to operate on the corresponding areas.
CONFIGURATIONS PANEL
RESET CODE
Allows editing of the selected user code.
DELETE CODE
Button, allows you to remove the code for the selected position.
KEYS AND RADIO CONTROLS ASSOCIATION WINDOW
When you select the position of a user with the mouse, you can immediately check whether keys or radio controls have been associated to that user.
At the same time, it will be possible to identify precisely which keys and/or radio controls are involved.
ASSOCIATED TIMER
Drop-down menu, can be used to associate a Timer with a code. This code can carry out the functions for which it was programmed, only when the
Timer is active and in the START time band.
NUMBER OF OPERATIONS
• Unlimited: checkbox; if selected, there is no limit on the number of operations that the selected user can perform within the course of a day.
• Numerical box: allows you to set a limit on the number of operations that the selected user can perform within the course of a day. The
operations counter is reset at midnight.
KEYPAD/READER AUTHORISATIONS
This section is for setting the control components with which the selected user is authorised to operate. If a user attempts to operate on a keypad for
which he is not authorised, once he has typed in his code, the keypad display will show an error message.
• Keypads / readers:
• Keypads/Safetouch/Touch devices/RFID readers: tab with a group of checkboxes; the selected checkboxes enable the selected user
to operate on the corresponding devices. The unchecked checkboxes, conversely,
prevent the user from performing any operation on the corresponding devices.
• PSTN (voice menu): checkbox; if selected, authorises the user to use the voice interface via the PSTN telephone line. The Messages module
must be present.
• Access via web: checkbox; if selected, authorises the user to use the web interface to connect to the control panel web server. The IP
communication module must be present.
• USB: checkbox; if selected, authorises the user to access the control panel, using the Safe Manager program connected to the control panel
USB port. A user could therefore access certain functions made available by the program, such as, for example, real-time display of
system status.
• GSM (voice menu - SMS commands): checkbox; if selected, authorises the user to use the voice interface via the GSM network. Also
enables the user to send commands and receive status SMSs from the control panel. The GSM
communication module and the Messages module must be present.
• Domotics: not used.
• Use App: used to enable the Phone App for the selected user.
ROBBERY CODE
Checkbox; if selected, enables the user to send Robbery alarms by means of a Robbery code.
DISABLE ACTIVATION WITH AREAS IN ALARM
Checkbox; if selected, prevents the user from activating the alarm when there are areas in alarm.
SEND MESSAGE OPTIONS
See description Send Message options on page. 89.
All active devices must permit the control panel to send notification to the digital communicator for events generated by the device itself [Reg. 16].
45
< BACK
< BACK
3.10.2 Installers
There must be at least one active installer [Reg. 53]
The installers section allows you to configure the codes intended for installers.
Installers
ID
Description
Installer type
51
Installer 1
Install. type 1
52
Installer 2
Install. type 1
53
Installer 3
Install. type 2
54
Installer 4
Install. type 2
55
Master
Master
56
Manufacturer
Manufacturer
Reset
Delete
ID Passwords associated with user
ID Radio controls associated with installer
Send message options
Send detailed events SMS
Send Email messages
Send digital communication
Send notification to App
STATUS/DESCRIPTION PANEL
ID
Uniquely identifies the installer code. The tick in the checkbox at the side indicates that an installer code has already been defined.
By default the "Master" code is 1961
DESCRIPTION
An editable, alphanumeric field; allows you to assign a name or description to the selected code. For example you might want to change “Installer
1” to “John Smith” to clearly identify the associated installer.
INSTALLER TYPE
Uneditable alphanumeric box; describes the type of installer. The authorisations will depend on the installer type (see “3.10.3 Access levels” on page
47).
CONFIGURATIONS PANEL
RESET CODE
Allows editing of the selected user code.
DELETE CODE
Button, allows you to remove the code for the selected position.
KEYS AND RADIO CONTROLS ASSOCIATION WINDOW
When you select the position of an installer with the mouse, you can immediately check whether keys or radio controls have been associated to that
installer. At the same time, it will be possible to identify precisely which keys and/or radio controls are involved.
SEND MESSAGE OPTIONS
See description Send Message options on page. 89.
46
All active devices must permit the control panel to send notification to the digital
communicator for events generated by the device itself [Reg. 16].
< BACK
< BACK
3.10.3 Access levels
In this section, you can enable each individual function for each individual user type. The option is enabled when the box is checked. The options
that can be enabled are listed below:
ID
OPTION
ID
OPTION
ID
OPTION
1
Activation
16
Extraordinary request
31
Zones menu
2
Deactivation
17
Request assistance
3
Individual Acts./Deacts.
4
Forced Activation
5
Outputs control
32
Outputs/Events group menu
18
Change PIN
33
Areas menu / Auto-activations
19
Reset control panel
34
Scenarios menu
20
Test devices
35
Tel and IP configuration menu
6
Alarms generation
21
Fault management
36
Telephone/signaller menu
7
Zones Exclusion
22
Lock alarms
37
Digital communicator menu
Remote support menu
8
Reset control panel alarms
23
Responder voice menu
38
9
Stop control panel alarms
24
Access program from PC
39
Timer menu
10
Reset area alarms
25
Access via WEB
40
Codes menu
11
Stop area alarms
26
SMS commands
41
Events log menu
12
Cancel system telephone actions
27
Domotics commands
42
Updating Firmware
13
Cancel area telephone actions
28
System menu
43
Reset installer alarms
14
Cancel telephone actions
29
Control devices menu
15
Cancel telephone actions on deactivation
30
Bus/radio expansions menu
Request assistance: allows a user to perform the "Installer authorisation" and "Manufacturer authorisation" commands.
ID
OPTION
CONFIGURATIONS REQUIRED BY STANDARD
At least one "user type" must be authorised to "request assistance". At least one user must be
associated to a "user type" authorised to "request assistance" [Reg. 54]
Request assistance At least one "installer type" must be authorised to "request assistance".
At least one installer must be associated to an "installer type" authorised to "request assistance"
[Reg. 55]
17
Only the installer can modify the pin, the keys and the radio controls of other users. User type 1, user
Change PIN type 2 and user type 3 cannot have "Change PIN" permission activated. No users can be assigned to
18
user type 4 [Reg. 56]
Reset control panel The control panel reset command can only be assigned to the manufacturer [Reg. 57]
19
Fault management At least one user and one installer must be authorised for fault management [Reg. 58]
21
24
Access program from PC Only the installer and manufacturer must be permitted to access the program from a PC [Reg. 59]
Codes menu Access to the codes menu must be enabled for all user types [Reg. 102]
40
Updating Firmware Only the manufacturer is permitted to update the firmware [Reg. 103]
42
Installer alarms reset must be active only for the installer
Reset installer alarms
To prevent users from resetting sabotage alerts (and level 3 fault alerts), deselect the flag “installer
(Incert only)
43
alarms reset” for all access levels: User types 1/2/3/4, Patrol and Manufacturer.
According to standard EN50131-1 (grade 2) there are up to 4 access levels with different operating capacities in the system:
• Level 1 (unknown user): does not allow operation on the system.
• Level 2 (normal user): allows operation on the system.
• Cannot update the FW of the peripherals.
• May be limited on a time basis through the use of a programmable timer.
• May carry out a programmable limited number of operations in a day.
• Is not authorised to change the system configuration.
• Level 3 (Master/installer): the Master is the "default installer" operating with default code 001961.
• Cannot update the FW of the peripherals.
• Must always be enabled by a level 2 user.
• Is automatically disabled 4 hours after being enabled by a level 2 user, unless he has been permanently enabled by the respective
enabling parameter.
• Level 4 (Manufacturer).
• only the manufacturer can update the FW of the system devices.
• Is automatically disabled 4 hours after being enabled by the level 3 user, unless he has been permanently enabled by the respective
enabling parameter.
To operate on the system, the installer must be enabled by the level 2 user via the keypad.
ENABLING A LEVEL 3 USER (VIA KEYPAD)
1.
2.
3.
4.
From the keypad, enter a valid user code (default 111111)
Press Prog.
The first line of the display will show the message "System Mgmt.” indicating that you can now modify the system options.
Using the navigation keys (up and down), select the “COMMANDS” menu on the second line of the display, and press Confirm: the message
“GENERATE COMMAND” will appear on the first line of the display.
5. Using the navigation keys (up and down), select “AUTH. INSTALLER?” on the second line, and press Confirm: the message “DONE” will appear
on the display.
47
< BACK
< BACK
HOW TO LOGOUT FROM DIFFERENT CONTROL DEVICES
From any device/application for system control after a determined period of time in which the user does not perform any operation
(timeout), the work session is closed automatically (logout).
To close the session before timeout, follow the indications in the table below.
Devices/Applications
Logout procedure
Vedolcd - Vedolcdprox
Vedo Touch
Mini Touch, Planux Manager, Icona
Manager ViP, Icona Manager SBC
Press "C" until you have exited the menus completely (i.e. until the date and time are displayed on the
keypad).
home
back
home
back
Press "Home" or "back" to return to the main page and close the "settings" work session
Press "Home" to return to the main page and logout from the "settings work session"
Press "back" to return to the main page and logout from the "settings work session"
For ANDROID Press the menu key on your own mobile device and press QUIT
Vedo App
1
1
Web server
Connecté
Press the logout key.
Bridge
Connecté
Press the logout key.
THE UNAUTHENTICATED USER can use only the delete key “C” or the numerical keys on the keypad. If a key that is not usable is pressed, the display will
show the message "FUNCTION NOT AVAILABLE".
THE USER WHO IS AUTHENTICATED on the keypad and who presses button C will be returned to the previous menu until the area status is displayed. If
the value of the area status display time for that keypad is not unlimited, the next time button C is pressed will return the keypad to standby position, without
giving any indication of the current area status (immediately hiding the information on the display).
48
< BACK
< BACK
3.10.4 Proximity keys
This section allows you to acquire RFID digital keys and assign them to users. You can save up to 56 keys.
ACQUIRING AN RFID DIGITAL KEY CODE
1. Select the position in which you intend to acquire the key.
2. Press the Acquire button.
Acquisition of digital key
Acquisition
Acquire from...
Message
Keypad: Reader 1
Acquire
Cancel
Key Code
OK
Cancel
3. From the "Reader to Acquire" drop-down menu, select the peripheral to use for acquisition of the digital key.
4. Press the Acquire button and enter the installer code (if requested) and confirm.
»» The selected peripheral will start emitting an audible signal. You can interrupt the procedure by clicking Cancel. Important: you cannot acquire a
key code if the position is not first freed, by deleting the existing key.
5. Bring the key to be registered close to the peripheral selected for acquisition. As soon as the code is acquired, the audible signal from the
peripheral will stop
6. The new acquisition will be shown in the Key Code field and the OK button will become available.
7. Press OK to finish.
ASSIGNING A KEY TO A USER
„„ To assign a key to a user or to modify the assignment of a key, simply select the user from the User drop-down menu.
DELETING AN RFID DIGITAL KEY CODE
1. With the mouse, select the key you intend to delete.
2. Click Delete.
3. When asked “Delete selected key?”, click “Yes”.
Proximity keys
ID
Description
User
Colour
1
Key 1
2
Key 2
<Not assign...
3
Key 3
<Not assign...
4
Key 4
<Not assign...
5
Key 5
<Not assign...
6
Key 6
<Not assign...
User 1
Yellow
Digital password
Acquire
Delete
ID
Uniquely identifies the user key. The tick in the checkbox at the side indicates that a key has already been registered.
DESCRIPTION
An editable, alphanumeric box; allows you to assign a name or description to the selected key. For example you might want to change “Key 1” to
“John S” to clearly identify the real associated user.
USER
Drop-down menu, allows you to assign a user and hence the latter's authorisations to a key.
COLOUR
Describes the real colour of the shell of the RFID key. Can be useful for differentiating key types according to the type of user to whom they will be
associated.
ACQUIRE
Button; clicking on it starts a key code acquisition procedure.
DELETE
Clicking on it starts a key code deletion procedure.
49
< BACK
< BACK
3.11 COMMUNICATION INTERFACES
This group of sections describes the communication interfaces other than the digital communicator.
3.11.1 IP Options
Important: to use the options, the following conditions must be met:
√√ The control panel must be equipped with an IP network card module.
√√ The IP network card module must be correctly connected to a switch or Ethernet router.
√√ The IP network card module must be configured as present by selecting the checkbox IP Network Card in the Expansions Present section of
the System Parameters menu.
IP Options
Options
Network Time Protocol Options
Check presence of connection to internet
Enable NTP
Enable DHCP (obtain IP address automatically)
IP Address
192,168. 1 .230
Subnet mask
255,255,255. 0
NTP Server
Dynamic DNS
Enable DDNS (Dynamic DNS)
Gateway
192,168. 1 . 1
D-DNS provider
Primary DNS
192,168. 1 . 1
Port
Secondary DNS
pool.ntp.org
comelitdns.com
80
Host name
0.0.0.0
Username
Host name
Password
Services configuration
http/https ports type
http port
https port
Standard
80
443
tls port
10022
TCP Port
10012
SMTP options
Enable SMTP
Server address
Port
25
Use SSL
Email
Username
Password
Email subject
OPTIONS
• Check presence of connection to internet: checkbox; if selected, allows the control panel to be informed of the presence or absence of the
Internet connection. If there is no connection, an anomaly is generated which is recorded by the
control panel.
• Enable DHCP (obtain IP address automatically): checkbox; has to be selected to enable the IP network card module to be assigned the
communication parameters automatically by the router/switch, without necessitating
manual entry. IMPORTANT: when this checkbox is selected, the IP Address, Subnet
Mask, Gateway, Primary DNS and Secondary DNS boxes will not be accessible for
modification.
• IP Address: numerical box for assigning a unique network address to the IP network card.
• Subnet mask: numerical box for selecting the subnet. With a few rare exceptions, for a home network the value to enter will be: 255.255.255.0.
• Gateway: numerical box for entering the IP address of the gateway necessary for Internet connection (given by the Internet service provider
– ISP).
• Primary DNS: numerical box for entering the IP address of the primary DNS necessary for Internet connection (given by the Internet service
provider – ISP)
• Secondary DNS: numerical box for entering the IP address of the secondary DNS necessary for Internet connection (given by the Internet
service provider – ISP).
• Host Name: alphanumeric box for entering the name by which the control panel will be recognised on the network.
50
< BACK
< BACK
NETWORK TIME PROTOCOL OPTIONS
These options serve periodically to synchronise the system clock with a sample time available via an internet connection.
• Enable NTP: checkbox; if selected, enables the control panel to update the control panel clock by means of an appropriate service.
• NTP Server: alphanumeric box; enter the address of the server you intend to use. A known, operational address is proposed by default. If you
intend to replace it with another service, consult the provider's site to obtain the server name to enter in the box.
DYNAMIC DNS
Normally, unless explicitly requested otherwise, a home internet connection provides a dynamic IP address associated with the internet connection.
This means that if the router is switched off and back on again for any reason (e.g. power outage) or if the provider decides to renegotiate the IP
address associated with the connection, the address changes.
Suppose you wish to access the control panel using the integrated WEB server on the IP network card: you must know the exact address of the
Internet connection the control panel is using.
Dynamic DNS is a service available subject to registration by which you can associate a fixed name to a dynamic address. This name can always
be used to connect to the card (even if the dynamic address changes).
IMPORTANT: to use this service you need to register with one of the suggested providers. On completion of registration, the service
provider will communicate all the necessary information for configuring the dynamic DNS service. (see chapter "5.2 Comelit DNS registration procedure for VEDOIP expansion" on page 79)
• Enable DDNS (Dynamic DNS): checkbox, must be selected to enable the IP network card to use a Dynamic DNS service. It also enables you
to configure the following options:
• D-DNS provider: drop-down menu for choosing one of the possible providers.
• Port, numerical box: for setting the port number to use for the service. This is normally port 80. Follow the
service provider's instructions however.
• Host Name: alphanumeric box, for entering the name decided at the time of requesting the service and
that the provider will have confirmed at the time of registering the service.
• User name: alphanumeric box for entering the User Name decided at the time of registration. This often
coincides with the address of a mailbox at the user's disposal.
• Password: alphanumeric box for entering the Password used when registering with the service.
SERVICES CONFIGURATION
To work properly, network services need to access ports that enable them to connect correctly. You can configure them in this section.
• Port type: drop-down menu, allows you to select from three possibilities. The table shows the possible choices.
HTTP/HTTPS PORTS TYPE DESCRIPTION
Standard
Alternative
Assigns the default port number for connections of type http and https (secure http). The values are assigned rigidly.
Assigns a pair of port numbers for http and https connections that is different from the default pair. Again, the values are
assigned rigidly.
Special
Allows you to assign a pair of port numbers freely. Use with care, only if necessary.
PORTS FOR ACCESS TO WEB PAGES
• http port: numerical box; normally contains the default port number for the http port (80), can be used for entering other values. Use with care,
only if necessary.
• https port: numerical box; normally contains the default port number for the http port (443), can be used for entering other values. Use with
care, only if necessary.
PORTS FOR REMOTE MANAGEMENT VIA SAFE MANAGER
• TLS port: numerical box, proposes a usable port, by default (10022). If necessary, allows you to assign a different port number from the default
number for TLS connection (encrypted TCP).
• TCP Port: numerical box, proposes a usable port, by default (10012). If necessary, allows you to assign a different port number from the default
number for standard TCP connection.
For remote connection, the ports on the router must be opened (see “Port forwarding (for Remote connection” page 78).
SMTP OPTIONS
These are the options that enable you to configure access to the email server to allow the transmission of email.
To use this service, you need an email account. The majority of data to be entered in this section relates to the email service provider.
• Enable SMTP: checkbox, must be selected to enable the IP network card module to connect to an email server.
• Server address: alphanumeric box for entering the address of the SMTP server made available by the email service provider. If is often of the
type smtp.xxxxxxx.yyy .
• Port: numerical box; the value 25 is proposed by default, which universally corresponds to the port used by the email services. If you use the
SSL encryption service, check the correct port number for this service with your provider.
• Use SSL: checkbox; if selected, obliges the IP network card to use an encrypted protocol with the email server. If you want to use it, it is
advisable first to check the availability of the service with the provider of the connection used for email.
• Email: alphanumeric box for entering the email address in use, from which you intend to send email.
• Username: alphanumeric box for entering the correct username to be used for accessing the email service.
• Password: alphanumeric box for entering the correct password to be used for accessing the email service.
• Email subject: alphanumeric box for entering the subject of the email, i.e. the title that will appear in the heading of outgoing messages.
51
< BACK
< BACK
3.11.2 GSM Options
Important: to use these options correctly, the following conditions must be met:
√√ The control panel must be equipped with the GSM expansion module, correctly connected to its antenna.
√√ The GSM expansion module must be configured as present by selecting the checkbox IP Network Card in the Expansions Present section of
the System Parameters menu.
GSM Options
SMS options
Forward SMS...
Communicator SIM options
Telephone 1
Telephone 9
Telephone 2
Telephone 10
Telephone 3
Telephone 11
Telephone 4
Telephone 12
Telephone 5
Telephone 6
Telephone 7
Telephone 8
Telephone 13
Telephone 14
Telephone
15 SSL
Utilizza
Telephone 16
6167
GSM card pin
Enable SIM expiry
11/02/2017
Checks on module
Enable jamming check
Credit remaining
Message to send*
SMS
Text to send*
credit
Service centre number*
40916
Email Options
MMS options
Enable MMS transmission
Enable email transmission
Enable sending email with attachment
Email subject
Email (sender)
http://mms.tim.it/servlets/mms
APN address*
mms.tim.it
Username*
GPRS options
APN address*
MMS subject
Service centre
address (MMSC)*
wap.tim.it
Username*
Password*
Password*
Proxy IP address*
mail.posta.tim.it
Card telephone number
3668907247
SMTP options
Server Address*
mail.posta.tim.it
25
Port*
Username*
Password*
TELEPHONE OPTIONS
Pressing the icon
takes you quickly to the "Telephone options" menu.
SMS OPTIONS
This section is for configuring the management of SMS messages.
• Forward SMS: checkbox; if enabled, allows forwarding of SMS messages that reach the control panel but do not pertain to a cellphone number
listed in the contacts list (e.g. promotions from the telephone company).
• Credit remaining: this section is for configuring the way in which the control panel can determine the credit remaining on the SIM card
• Message to send: drop-down menu; select Call or SMS according to the procedure used by the phone company. See
also Default Settings.
• Text to send: alphanumeric box; enter the text required by the phone company if determining remaining credit involves
sending an SMS. See also Default Settings.
• Service centre number: alphanumeric box; enter the number of the phone company's SMS service centre. See also
Default Settings.
COMMUNICATOR SIM OPTIONS
• GSM card PIN: numerical box for entering the code for unlocking the SIM fitted on the GSM communication card.
• Enable SIM expiry: if active, enables checking the SIM expiry.
CHECKS ON MODULE
• Enable jamming check: checkbox; if selected, enables the module to generate an indication to the control panel if an attempt to mask the GSM
signal is detected. Jamming control must be active if the GSM module is configured [Reg. 60]
LOAD DEFAULT SETTINGS (ICON IN THE FORM OF A CELLPHONE)
ress the icon
P
to automatically set the parameters for managing remaining credit. This option also automatically loads the known parameters
for possible Email and MMS connections relating to the selected phone company. IMPORTANT: if any data are already present in the fields
involved in the automatic loading process, these will be overwritten. The table shows the data that can be loaded automatically (and
overwritten if appropriate).
52
< BACK
< BACK
SECTION
PRE-DEFINABLE PARAMETERS (OVERWRITTEN IF APPROPRIATE)
SMS options Text to send, service centre number
Email Options APN address, Username, Password
SMTP options Server address, Port
MMS options Service centre address (MMSC), APN address, Username, Password, Proxy IP address
Telephone companies
Select
Telephone Company
OK
Cancel
• Telephone Company: drop-down menu, allows you to select a phone company in order to load automatically its parameters and remaining
credit request procedures, its email connection parameters and its MMS connection parameters. The providers
currently present are TIM, Vodafone and Wind.
EMAIL OPTIONS
To use the email service, you need an email address that you can access via the control panel GSM module. In this section, you can configure the
GSM module and set the parameters and options relating to email messages.
• Enable email transmission: checkbox; if selected, enables the module to send emails.
• Enable sending email with attachment: checkbox; if selected, enables the module to send emails with attached images captured by the
cameras connected to any Pal-IP modules in the system.
• Email subject: alphanumeric box for entering the text that you want to appear in the Subject field of the email.
• Email (sender): alphanumeric box for entering the email address that you want to use for communication.
• GPRS options:
• APN address: alphanumeric box for entering the address of the phone company's GPRS access point (information provided
by the phone company). If you use the Load option in the Default Settings section, this parameter can be
entered automatically for certain companies.
• Username: alphanumeric box. Check whether you need to enter a Username with your phone company.
• Password: alphanumeric box. Check whether you need to enter a Password with your phone company.
• SMTP options:
• Server address: alphanumeric box for entering the address of the phone company's SMTP server (information provided by
the phone company). If you use the Load option in the Default Settings section, for some companies this
parameter might be entered automatically.
• Port: alphanumeric box for entering the port number corresponding to the phone company's SMTP server (information
provided by the phone company). If you use the Load option in the Default Settings section, for some companies this
parameter might be entered automatically.
• Username: alphanumeric box for entering the Username of the email account that you intend to use.
• Password: alphanumeric box for entering the Password of the email account that you intend to use.
MMS OPTIONS
This section is for configuring the necessary parameters for sending MMS messages. This section must be correctly set if you intend to send images
captured by cameras connected to PAL-IP modules by MMS.
• Enable MMS transmission: checkbox; if selected, enables the module to send MMS messages.
• MMS subject: alphanumeric box for entering the text that you want to appear in the Subject field of the MMS message.
• MMS service centre address: alphanumeric box for entering the address of the phone company's MMS server (information provided by the
phone company). If you use the Load option in the Default Settings section, for some companies this parameter
might be entered automatically.
• APN address: alphanumeric box for entering the address of the phone company's MMS access point (information provided by the phone
company). If you use the Load option in the Default Settings section, this parameter can be entered automatically for certain
companies.
• Username: alphanumeric box. Check whether you need to enter a Username with your phone company.
• Password: alphanumeric box. Check whether you need to enter a Password with your phone company.
• Proxy IP address: alphanumeric box for entering the address of the proxy server dedicated to the phone company's MMS service (information
provided by the phone company). If you use the Load option in the Default Settings section, this parameter can be entered
automatically for certain companies.
• Port: alphanumeric box for entering the port number corresponding to the phone company's MMS service (information provided by the phone
company).
• Card telephone number: numerical box for entering the number of the phone card fitted in the GSM module. You can enter the number with
or without the country dialling code, but you cannot use the format preceded by a + sign for the country dialling code.
For example to enter an Italian phone number:
With country dialling code, use the form:
Without country dialling code, use the form:
53
003933398765432
33398765432
< BACK
< BACK
3.11.3 Pal/IP video module
In the project there must be no active or isolated Palip devices [Reg. 104]
This section is for configuring, adding or deleting PAL-IP devices.
Pal-Ip video module
ID Description
Active
1 Pal/Ip 1
Absent
2 Pal/Ip 2
Area
Display technical alarms
Status
Network parameters
0.0.0.0
IP Address
UDP Port
Assign new IP to module...
9069
Netmask
...
Gateway
...
Address acquisition mode
Static address
VIP options
input
Area 2
Area 3
Area 4
Logic address
00030001
Streaming video timeout
60
Technical alarms cycles (bus / voltage levels)
Cameras installed
Area 6
Camera 1
Area 8
Cycles
Unlimited
Area 5
Area 7
seconds
Areas (1)
0
Area 1
Area 2
Area 3
Area 4
Area 5
Area 6
Area 7
Area 8
Area 1
Area 2
Area 3
Area 4
Area 5
Area 6
Area 7
Area 8
Area 1
Area 2
Area 3
Area 4
Area 5
Area 6
Area 7
Area 8
Area 1
Area 2
Area 3
Area 4
Area 5
Area 6
Area 7
Area 8
Camera 2
Areas (2)
Camera 3
Areas (3)
Camera 4
Areas (4)
Video acquisition mode
PAL
Pre-alarm recording
Analogue camera
<None>
Cameras installed (IP)
IP1 Camera
1-ip camera
Area 1
Area 2
Area 3
Area 4
Areas (1)
Area 5
Area 6
Area 7
Area 8
Username
admin
Password
****
IP/Hostname
nomehostname
Low resolution channel
/channel/1
URL preview
rtsp://admin:****@nomehostname:554/channel/1
High resolution channel
/channel/2
URL preview
rtsp://admin:****@nomehostname:554/channel/1
RTSP port
554
Images
Images to capture (num)
4
Send message options
Send detailed events SMS
Send Email messages
Send digital communication
Send notification to App
54
< BACK
< BACK
STATUS/DESCRIPTION PANEL
STATUS / ID / DESCRIPTION
See description Status / ID / Description on page 87.
AREAS PANEL
AREA
Alphanumeric box; shows the name assigned to the control panel areas.
DISPLAY TECHNICAL ALARMS AREAS
Column of checkboxes; by checking the appropriate checkboxes, you can choose the areas to which to send technical alarms generated by the
selected PAL/IP module.
CONFIGURATIONS PANEL
NETWORK PARAMETERS
This section is for configuring the communication parameters of the PAL/IP module to make it reachable via the data network.
• IP address: numerical box; shows the IP address of the module in the selected position. For a PAL/IP module that has not yet been configured,
the data shown will be 0.0.0.0.
• UDP Port: numerical box; shows the UDP port number used by the module in the selected position.
• Assign new IP to module: button for launching the for registration/verification of the IP communication of the module in the selected position.
NEW MODULE IP PROGRAMMING POP-UP
Clicking on Assign New IP to Module opens a pop-up for verifying the status of the communication of the selected module and to changing its
parameters if you want.
Pal-Ip parameters programming
Pal-Ip video module to update
Current IP address (Pal-Ip video module)
0 . 0 . 0 . 0
Current netmask (Pal-Ip video module)
0 . 0 . 0 . 0
New IP address
192.168. 1 .234
New netmask
Ping
Ping
255.255.255. 0
Gateway
192.168. 1 . 1
Address acquisition mode
Static address
Alarm panel
Final IP address (control unit)
192.168. 1 .230
Run
Ping
Close
• Pal-IP video module to update
• Current IP address (Pal/IP module): numerical box; shows the current address but also allows you to enter a different
address manually.
Programming Pal-Ip parameters
Pal-Ip video module to update
• Load default
Current IP address (Pal-Ip video module)
New IP address
New netmask
Gateway
0 . 0 . 0
Ping
: 0b.utton,
for loading
an IP address that corresponds to the factory-set address of the Pal/IP module.
.
.
.
Ping
Requests
confirmation
before performing the operation.
0 .. 0 .. 0 .. 0
• Ping: button; click
it to run a check on the presence of a Pal/IP device at the address shown in the IP Address box to its left.
0 . 0 . 0 . 0
address
• New IP address:Static
numerical
box for entering the IP address that you intend to assign to the Pal/IP module, to change is
current
address. (This operation is necessary when there are several Pal/IP modules in the system).
Alarm panel
Address acquisition mode
192.168.
• Ping: button; click
it to1 .230
run a Ping
check on the presence of a device at the address shown in the IP Address box to its left.
Serves to check
that
the
new address you intend to assign to the selected PAL/IP module is not already present on
Close
Run
the system.
Current IP address (control unit)
• New netmask: numerical box for entering the value of the new netmask for identifying the subnet (normally enter
255.255.255.0).
• Gateway: numerical box, for entering the gateway value (e.g. 192.1681.1.).
• Address acquisition mode: for future uses.
• Alarm control panel
• Final IP address (control panel): numerical box; shows the current address of the control panel IP communication module.
• Ping: button; click it to run a check on the presence of the control panel IP card at the address shown in the IP Address
box to its left.
• Run: button; confirms and launches the operation of assigning IP addresses.
• Close: button; enables you to exit the procedure without changing anything.
VIP OPTIONS
Configurations for viewing the cameras connected to PAL-IP modules Art. VEDOCCTV.
• Logic address: field for entering a logic address for the device. The address must be a completely unique 8-digit number.
• Streaming video timeout: determines the maximum duration of a video call; the same value must be set on the supervision devices (Safetouch,
App...). If the values are different, the lower value is applied.
55
< BACK
< BACK
TECHNICAL ALARMS CYCLES (BUS/VOLTAGE LEVELS)
• Unlimited: checkbox; if selected, there is no limit on the number of technical alarm cycles that can be generated per activation cycle.
• Cycles: numerical box; if the Unlimited checkbox is not selected, this box enables you to set a limit to the number of technical alarm cycles that
can be generated, measured between one activation and the next.
CAMERAS INSTALLED
In this section you have to select the cameras installed, add the description and select the areas to be associated to the respective camera.
You can choose not to select a camera that is present( for example to exclude its operation temporarily or because it is faulty). A camera must not
be selected if it is not physically connected to the PAL/IP module, as this would generate a fault associated with the module.
• Areas: determines which areas the camera will be associated with.
• Video acquisition mode: to speed up the capture of the first image, do not select Autoswitch mode.
• Pre-alarm recording: Allows you to select the analogue camera on which to make the continuous recording.
CAMERAS INSTALLED (IP)
In this section you have to select the IP cameras installed, add the description and select the areas to be associated to the respective camera. You
can choose not to select a camera that is present( for example to exclude its operation temporarily or because it is faulty). A camera must not be
selected if it is not physically connected to the PAL/IP module, as this would generate a fault associated with the module.
• IP(x) Camera
•
Auto-configuration button: Press the button and select the model of camera used (IP100 / IP700) to auto-configure the URL
of the channels.
• Areas: determines which areas the camera will be associated with.
• Username: User name for IP CAM access (as for camera configuration)
• Password: Password for IP CAM access (as for camera configuration)
• IP/Hostname: Hostname or IP address for IP CAM (as for camera configuration)
• Low resolution channel: channel for low resolution video streaming (for Comelit cameras IPCAM100="/ch01_sub.264", for Comelit
cameras IPCAM700="/1/stream2", for cameras supplied by third parties, refer to the respective manuals)
• URL preview: URL address for the "Low resolution channel" stream from the IP (x) camera. To be used in programs that allow viewing
of rtsp video streaming.
• High resolution channel: channel for high resolution video streaming (for Comelit cameras IPCAM100="/ch01.264", for Comelit
cameras IPCAM700="/1/stream1", for cameras supplied by third parties, refer to the respective manuals)
• URL preview: URL address for the "High resolution channel" stream from the IP (x) camera. To be used in programs that allow viewing
of rtsp video streaming.
• RTSP port: RTSP service port of the IP CAM
If using third-party IP cameras, make sure that:
• They support the default video streaming configuration, i.e. MJPEG, 320x240 pixel with FPS from 1 to 12.
• The URL providing access to video streaming for the IP camera is known.
All IP cameras interfacing with the VEDOCCTV module should adopt the same configuration as the low-definition channel (same
codec, same resolution, same frame rate...).
IMAGES
This section is for selecting how many images (frames) must be captured when required (e.g. as a result of a zone in alarm). The images will be
captured at intervals of one second.
The captured images can be sent as MMS, email and notifications to Vedo App.
• Images to capture: numerical box, allows you to set the number of images to capture. The value is between 1 and 4.
SEND MESSAGE OPTIONS
See description Send Message options on page. 89.
CONFIGURING A PAL/IP MODULE
Pal-Ip parameters programming
Pal-Ip video module to update
Current IP address (Pal-Ip video module)
Current netmask (Pal-Ip video module)
New IP address
New netmask
Gateway
Address acquisition mode
0 . 0 . 0 . 0
Ping
0 . 0 . 0 . 0
192.168. 1 .234
Ping
255.255.255. 0
192.168. 1 . 1
Static address
Alarm panel
Final IP address (control unit)
192.168. 1 .230
Run
Ping
Close
After correctly installing at least one PAL/IP module, proceed as follows to
Programming Pal-Ip parameters
configure it:
Pal-Ip videoNew
module to
1. Click on Assign
IPupdate
to Module.
Current IP address (Pal-Ip video module)
Ping
2. In the pop-up
press the button . 0 . 0 . 0 . 0
New IP address
.
.
.
3. A new pop-up
will ask you to confirm
loading
ofPing
the factory-set address.
New netmask
0 .. 0 .. 0 .. 0
4. Confirm.
Gateway
0 . 0 . 0 . 0
5. When theAddress
pop-up
closes, the default address will have bee loaded. Press the
acquisition mode
Static address
Ping button to check whether the module is reachable. If it is not, check the
Alarm
panel
connections (power supply and IP network).
(control unit)
192.168. 1 .230
Ping
6. Enter theCurrent
newIP address
address
to be assigned
to the module
(e.g. 192.168.1.234) in
the New IP Address field.
Close
Run
7. Press the Ping button next to the new address to make sure that it is not already in use. If you receive an 'address present' reply , change it (e.g.
to 192.168.1.235) and repeat the Ping test. No module should reply to the address that you want to assign to the PAL/IP module.
8. Enter the Netmask value (default 255.255.255.0).
9. Enter the Gateway value.
10.Press Run.
N.B.: The default IP address is 192.168.1.233 for all the PAL/IP modules. If two Pal/IP video modules are installed, it is imperative to
reprogram the IP address of at least one of the two modules. Failure to do so could cause an IP address conflict on the network. You are
advised to reprogram one module at a time, keeping the other module disconnected from the IP network.
56
< BACK
< BACK
3.11.4 Cloud Options
In this section you can configure the cloud service to save Push notifications to be sent to the Apps.
Cloud Options
Connection
Enable Cloud service
Server Address
eps.comelitgroup.com
Port
443
Use secure SSL/TLS connection
Cloud Recording
Reset
CONNECTION
Configurations for connection to the Comelit Cloud service.
• Enable Cloud service: checkbox, when selected, enables the Comleit Cloud service.
• Server address: alphanumeric box, enter the address of the server on which the Comelit Cloud service is installed.
• Port: numerical box, enter the port to be used for connection to the Comelit Cloud service (default: 443).
• Use secure SSL/TLS connection: checkbox, select this option to use the secure SSL/TLS connection.
CLOUD RECORDING
• Reset: button, resets the recording information of the control panel at Comelit Cloud, to allow a new recording
57
< BACK
< BACK
3.12 COMMUNICATOR
3.12.1 Telephone Options
Telephone Options
Answer
Number of rings (only PSTN)
Priority management
Priority
3
send message requesting user code input:
SMS
Skip fax (only PSTN)
MMS
Message repetitions
5
Email
Pause between repetitions
1
Voice call
Code recognition time (sec.)
20
Digital communication
Tones recognition timeout (sec)
10
Call
Switchboard
Telephone line parameters
Italy/Malta
Prefix number
PSTN settings
Pulse dialling
Tones check
Telephone line check
Telephone signaller parameters
Send message after
Press key 1
End call with keys
Maximum duration of single call (sec)
60
Voice delay / wait duration (sec)
10
Voice message repetition
3
Pause between repetitions (sec)
1
Attempts
3
ANSWER
• Number of rings (only PSTN): numerical box, allows you to set the number of rings that the control panel must wait for before engaging the
line after an incoming telephone call.
• Send message requesting user code input: checkbox; if selected, allows the control panel that has replied to a telephone call, to generate an
audio message requesting the input of a valid user code, via the keypad of the calling telephone.
Also applies to communication on GSM network.
• Skip fax (only PSTN): checkbox; if selected, enables the fax/answering service override mechanism. Fax/answering service override function:
the calling user makes the device ring once only and then ends the call. If a new ring is detected within no more than
120 seconds, the control panel obtains the line immediately, regardless of the number of rings set in Number of Rings.
• Message repeats (for future uses): numerical box, allows you to set the number of times the welcome message must be repeated.
• Pause between repeats (for future uses): numerical box, allows you to set the pause between repeats of the message.
• Code recognition time (sec.): numerical box, allows you to set the maximum time within which a valid user code must be entered, after the
request for input by the control panel.
• Tones recognition timeout (sec): numerical box, allows you to set the maximum waiting time for completing the user code once its entry has
been started. = 60 sec [Reg. 61]
CALL
• Telephone line parameters: drop-down menu, allows you to set the line parameters according to the specifications of the country in which the
control panel is installed (Italy/Malta, Czech Republic/Slovakia, Slovenia, Croatia, Greece, Bulgaria, Gibraltar, CI
Jersey/Cyprus/UK, Hungary).
PSTN SETTINGS
• Pulse dialling: if selected it dials the telephone number in pulse mode.
• Tones check: if selected it checks the line free tone before dialling the telephone number.
Selected [Reg. 67]
• Telephone line check: checkbox; if selected, it enables telephone line checking. If the telephone line is faulty or not connected, a fault alarm
is generated Selected [Reg. 68]
• Prefix number (switchboard): by entering this parameter, all the outgoing calls from the PSTN will add this number as a prefix to all the
numbers saved in the telephone directory and in the digital communicator. The check for a dial tone will be
performed only after the prefix is dialled. Empty [Reg. 133]
TELEPHONE SIGNALLER PARAMETERS
• Send message after: drop-down menu (see table), allows you to put the telephone signaller audio message online after obtaining the line after
a call, according to the procedure set in the drop-down menu. = Press key 1 [Reg. 65]
58
< BACK
< BACK
SELECTION FROM THE
BEHAVIOUR OF THE TELEPHONE SIGNALLING DEVICE
MENU
Delay the message will be sent after the delay time set in the "delay" parameters
Press key 1 Once the line is obtained, if the caller presses the 1 key on his telephone (in DTMF mode), the message will be transmitted to the caller
Voice delay not implemented
• End call with keys: checkbox; if selected, authorises the users to stop the call or calls (depending on the key pressed). If not selected, the
control panel will end the call only after repeating the message the set number of times. Selected [Reg. 66]
KEY PRESSED END CALL TYPE
Hash (#) Ends the call but does not cancel calls to other numbers
Asterisk(*) Ends the call and cancels calls to other numbers
• Maximum duration of single call (sec): numerical box, allows you to set the maximum duration of the communication. On expiry of the set
time, the control panel will disconnect the line. = 60 sec [Reg. 62]
• Voice delay / wait duration (sec): numerical box, allows you to set the maximum silent waiting time before transmitting the message of the
telephone signaller to the caller. Also see the option "Send message after".
• Voice message repetition: numerical box, allows you to set the number of times the telephone signaller message transmitted to the caller must
be repeated. = 5 [Reg. 63]
• Pause between repetitions (sec): numerical box, allows you to set the pause between repetitions of the telephone signaller message during
transmission to the caller.
• Attempts: numerical box, allows you to set the total number of attempts that the communicator will make to dial each telephone number if the
call fails. = 3 [Reg. 64]
PRIORITY MANAGEMENT
The system manages the sending of alert messages according to two priority levels. Until it has finished sending one type of alert, it does not start
to send the next type.
The first level is events priority (in order of priority): Alarms, Sabotage, Anomalies, Exclusions and Other (order cannot be changed).
he second level is the priority of sending messages by type of alert sent (SMS, email, MMS, voice call, digital communication) and it can be
T
from the box "Priority management".
configured by Safe Manager using the arrow keys
App notifications are sent immediately when the event is generated.
If there is no digital communicator, the following general events must be indicated (transmission of the corresponding voice message must also have
been completed): [Reg. 80]
System/ZoneAlarm/Robbery
System/Fault/Siren battery fault
System/ZoneAlarm/Burglary
System/Generic/Timed activation error
System/ZoneAlarm/H24
System/Fault/Failed activation fault
System/OR alarm/Sabotage
System/Fault/Zone Fault
System/OR alarm/Expansion buses
System/Fault/Robbery Zone Fault
System/Fault/Control panel ID power supply unit fault
System/Fault/Motion sensor jamming fault
System/Fault/Radio zone battery fault
Timer/Timer Events/Timer ON/Regular pstn and email communication
Timer/Timer Events/Timer ON/Regular gsm communication
3.12.2 Phone Book
There must be at least one digital communicator selected or at least one telephone configured in the phone book (there must be at least one telephone
number in the phone book or in the digital communicator contacts list) [Reg. 69]
This is the section for entering the telephone numbers to be contacted and any email addresses, and for enabling the types of communication for
each contact on the contacts list.
Telephone contacts list
MMS reception
3
Email reception
3407959221
SMS reception
1
2
Telephone
Stop calls
Email
ID
Description
Telephone 1
Telephone 2
Telephone 3
4
Sixteen
numbers are available in theTelephone
contact4list. For the sake of brevity, the picture shows only four.
ID
Numerical box, uniquely identifies the position in the contacts list.
DESCRIPTION
Alphanumeric box for entering name and surname or identity (e.g. in the case of a company) of the user to contact.
for each active phone [Reg. 70]
A description must be entered
EMAIL
Alphanumeric box for entering the email address to be associated to the selected user.
59
< BACK
< BACK
STOP CALLS
Checkbox; if selected, allows the selected user to stop the flow of calls directly from the telephone using the Hash (#) and Asterisk (*) keys. The "End
Call With Keys" option must be enabled in Telephone Options.
RECEIVING SMS / EMAIL / MMS
Checkbox; if selected, enables the selected user to receive SMS/email/MMS sent from the control panel.
3.12.3 Digital communicator contacts list
There must be at least one digital communicator selected or at least one telephone configured in the phone book (there must be at least one telephone
number in the phone book or in the digital communicator contacts list) [Reg. 69]
The control panel has a digital communicator to Contact ID standard, which is useful for interfacing correctly with a monitoring control panel.
The Contact ID communication function is currently supported only by the PSTN line interface.
This is the section for entering the telephone numbers to be contacted digitally, and for configuring the connection procedures for each contact on
the contacts list.
Digital communicator contacts list
Hands-free after report (sec.)
Customer
code
Call attempts
Protocol
Number to call
Test period (hours)
Description
Enable periodic test
Send area code
ID
Periodic test start date
1 Telephone 1
2 Telephone 2
3 Telephone 3
Contact ID
Contact ID
0
0
11/02/2013 8:38
11/02/2013 8:38
24
24
1
1
0
0
4 Telephone 4
Contact ID
0
11/02/2013 8:38
24
1
0
Contact ID
0
11/02/2013 8:38
24
1
0
ID
Numerical box, uniquely identifies the position in the contacts list.
DESCRIPTION
Alphanumeric box for entering the ID of the monitoring control panel to contact.
NUMBER TO CALL
Alphanumeric box for entering the telephone number for the company contracted to provide the monitoring and telephone checking service.
PROTOCOL
Drop-down menu, allows you to select the format of communication to the monitoring control panel. Only Contact ID standard is currently available.
Select a communication protocol for each phone number entered. [Reg. 73]
CUSTOMER CODE
lphanumeric code for entering the code provided by the monitoring control panel. Also enables the monitoring control panel automatically to
a
recognise the system making the communication. The user code must be specified for each phone number entered [Reg. 76]
SEND AREA CODE
Checkbox; if selected, ensures that the area code is sent to the monitoring control panel (see Areas menu) and not the customer code set in the line.
This is useful in the case of multiple-user systems.
ENABLE PERIODIC TEST
Checkbox for enabling the periodic test function.
<= 25 hours for each phone number entered [Reg. 74]
The periodic test must be active for each phone number entered [Reg. 72] The test period must be
PERIODIC TEST START DATE
Start date of the periodic test.
The start date of the periodic test must precede the current date for each phone number entered [Reg. 77]
TEST PERIOD
Numerical box for entering the frequency, expressed in hours, of the periodic test. If you enter 24, the test will be carried out 24 hours after the start
date and every 24 hours thereafter.
CALL ATTEMPTS
Numerical box for entering the number of call attempts that the system will make even in the event of failure to connect to the monitoring control
The number of call attempts must be = 1 for each phone number entered [Reg. 75]
panel.
HANDS-FREE AFTER REPORT
Not supported
60
< BACK
< BACK
3.12.4 Generic events
This section is for configuring the events that can generate communications/messages to the devices. In practice, the configuration of a generic
event consists of assigning behaviour rules and procedures for contacting the available telephone numbers to each of the forty-eight possible
events.
If there is no digital communicator, the following general events must be indicated (transmission of the corresponding voice message must also have
been completed): [Reg. 80]
System/ZoneAlarm/Robbery
System/Generic/Timed activation error
System/ZoneAlarm/Burglary
System/Fault/Failed activation fault
System/ZoneAlarm/H24
System/Fault/Zone Fault
System/OR alarm/Sabotage
System/Fault/Robbery Zone Fault
System/OR alarm/Expansion buses
System/Fault/Motion sensor jamming fault
System/Fault/Control panel ID power supply unit fault
Timer/Timer Events/Timer ON/Regular pstn and email communication
System/Fault/Radio zone battery fault
Timer/Timer Events/Timer ON/Regular gsm communication
System/Fault/Siren battery fault
Generic events
Send reset email
Telephone
5 Event 5
Send activation email
4 Battery low
Send reset SMS
3 No network
Reset voice message
2 Tamper Alarm
Activation voice message
1 Burglar Alarm
Send activation SMS
ID Description
6 Event 6
7 Event 7
8 Event 8
9 Event 9
Smith John
10 Event 10
Telephone 2
11 Event 11
Telephone 3
12 Event 12
Telephone 4
TEXT TO SPEECH CONFIGURATION
utton for configuring the Text-to-Speech section by loading the voice to be used for audio transmission. The procedure is described in detail in
B
the Free Voice Messages section on page 8.
STATUS/DESCRIPTION PANEL
ID
Numerical box, uniquely identifies the position of the event.
DESCRIPTION
Alphanumeric box, contains a description of the event to which the parameters in the line correspond.
TELEPHONE PANEL
TELEPHONE
Description identifying the telephone in the contacts list.
ACTIVATION VOICE MESSAGE
Checkbox; if selected, enables the transmission of a voice message activating an event. For all generic events with a configured event (excluding
tests), the sending of an activation voice message must be enabled for at least one phone enabled in the phone book [Reg. 78]
RESET VOICE MESSAGE
Checkbox; if selected, enables the transmission of a voice message resetting an event.
For all generic events with a configured event (excluding
tests), the sending of a reset voice message must be enabled for at least one phone enabled in the phone book [Reg. 79]
SEND ACTIVATION SMS
Checkbox; if selected, enables the transmission of an SMS activating an event.
SEND RESET SMS
Checkbox; if selected, enables the transmission of an SMS resetting an event.
SEND ACTIVATION EMAIL
Checkbox; if selected, enables the transmission of an email activating an event.
SEND RESET EMAIL
Checkbox; if selected, enables the transmission of an email resetting an event.
61
< BACK
< BACK
CONFIGURATIONS PANEL
OPTIONS
Options
Priority event
Voice message
Auto-composed
Select free
voice message
Burglary Message
Stop calls
Priority to call on PSTN
SMS
Message
Email
None
DVR camera link
Selection
Selection
Burglary SMS
Burglary Email
3
• Priority event: checkbox. Events are normally processed in order of presentation. If this checkbox is selected, the event is processed before all
other events that do not have this checkbox selected. If there is already one or more priority events at the front of the queue, the
new event is placed in the queue behind the priority events already present.
• Voice message: drop-down menu, regulates the association of a voice message to the selected event. The possibilities are: none, autocomposed, message (for "message" it is possible to choose one of 16 free voice messages that can be configured from the
respective section).
• Select free voice message: drop-down menu, allows you to select one of the 16 free voice messages configured, so that it is sent when an
event occurs.
• Stop calls: checkbox; if selected, a number enabled to stop calls can stop the call or sequence of calls according to the command sent (# key
stop current call only, * key stop all subsequent calls in addition to current call).
• Priority to call on PSTN: checkbox; if selected, if there is a GSM expansion module and an enabled PSTN interface, when an event occurs,
the first communication attempt will be made using the PSTN telephone interface.
• SMS: drop-down menu, regulates the association of an SMS to the selected event. The possibilities are: none, auto-composed, message (for
"message" it is possible to choose one of 16 SMSs that can be configured from the respective section).
• Selection (SMS): drop-down menu, allows you to select one of the SMSs configured, so that it is sent when an event occurs.
• Email: drop-down menu, regulates the association of an email to the selected event. The possibilities are: none, auto-composed, message (for
"message" it is possible to choose one of 16 email messages that can be configured from the respective section).
• Selection (Email): drop-down menu, allows you to select one of the emails configured, so that it is sent when an event occurs.
OTHER OPTIONS (SMS AND EMAIL)
Other options (SMS/email/Vocal messages)
Send system address
Create web link
• Send system address: checkbox; if selected, adds the system address to SMS, voice messages and email
messages.
• Create web link: checkbox; if selected, adds to SMS and email messages the link DDNS (hostname)* with
which it is possible to reach the system. *see chapter “IP Options” on page 50.
EVENT
• Event type: allows you to associate a main type of event to the general event, e.g. an event belonging to the Area events type (see table on
page 92).
• Event subtype: allows you to refine your choice by selecting a subtype of the category set as Event Type; going back to the Area events type
example, the subtype could be Zone Alarm (see table on page 92).
• Event: corresponds to the maximum detail and allows you to specify exactly which event will allow output activation (see table on page 92).
Going back to the example, the event could be Burglary, thereby making it possible to activate the output if a burglary is detected by an
activated area.
• AND/OR and selection box: only for certain types of event is an AND/OR selection block available which, together with a selection box, allows
you to organise and, if appropriate, determine the status of the output.
•
•
T
he OR condition is useful when you intend to group events originating from several sources in a single
output: in the case of an AREAS type of event, for example, it is possible to signal the activation status
of the first three areas on one output only, by selecting, for example, the checkboxes for the first three
areas: in this case, the output would activate if at least one of the three areas was activated, and would
be deactivated if all three areas were deactivated.
T
he AND condition is useful for providing summary information of the fact that a certain status is
common, for example, to two or more areas. A practical example, similar to the previous one, could
be a confirmation of activation of several areas, by selecting, for example, the checkboxes of the first
three areas: in this case, the output would activate only if all three areas were activated, and would be
deactivated if any one of the three areas were deactivated.
ometimes, instead of a selection block based on checkboxes like the one just described, a drop-down
S
menu will be displayed: in this case the AND or the OR condition will be constructed on the basis of the
options chosen from these menus.
• Generate auto-composed message: Button; when pressed, generates a message deriving from the configuration of the event, and enters it
in the text fields of the auto-composition section.
62
< BACK
< BACK
AUTO-COMPOSITION
Auto-composition
Message type
Areas.
Part A
Burglar Zone Alarm
Part B
Generate audio
Input. Area 2. Area 3. Area 4.
Play
In this section, the auto-composed message is converted into audio so that it can be sent by telephone.
• Message type: alphanumeric box containing a description of the type of auto-composed message.
• Part A: alphanumeric box containing a description of the event.
• Part B: alphanumeric box containing details about the event (e.g. zones involved, areas involved, etc.).
• Generate audio: button; if pressed, converts the text in the three text fields (Message Type, Part A and Part B) into audio format.
• Play: button; if pressed, allows you to listen to the message converted into audio through the PC speakers.
63
< BACK
< BACK
3.12.5 Detailed events
This is the section in which you can select whether to send messages for each event or action detected by the control panel, and if so, what type
of messages. This detailed section works in conjunction with the individual permissives for the transmission of detailed messages present in each
zone screen, area screen etc.
You can configure up to eight groups of independent telephone numbers, with different communication characteristics.
Detailed events
ID Description
1 Job
2 Family
3 Tel. group 3
4 Tel. group 4
5 Tel. group 5
6 Tel. group 6
7 Tel. group 7
8 Tel. group 8
STATUS/DESCRIPTION PANEL
ID
Numerical box, uniquely identifies the position of the group of telephone numbers of the phone/App to which to send the messages.
DESCRIPTION
Alphanumeric box, contains an ID for the group of selected telephone numbers.
The Group 8 "Test MMS/Com. Dig" is the ID for the group of dedicated telephone numbers for the send MMS test (on the telephone, 16 in the phone
book) and for sending digital Communications (on the telephone, 4 in the digital communicator contacts list).
ID
Telephone contacts
list phones
ID
1
Telephone 1
1
Telephone 1
2
Telephone 2
2
Telephone 2
3
Telephone 3
3
Telephone 3
4
Telephone 4
4
Telephone 4
5
Telephone 5
6
Telephone 6
7
Telephone 7
8
Telephone 8
9
Telephone 9
10
Telephone 10
11
Telephone 11
12
Telephone 12
Telephone 13
13
Telephone 14
14
15
Telephone 15
Telephone 16
16
ID
Digital Com.
telephones
Apps
1
App 1
2
App 2
3
App 3
4
App 4
5
App 5
6
App 6
7
App 7
8
App 8
TELEPHONE CONTACTS LIST PHONES
In this section, for each group of telephones it is possible to enable up to sixteen telephone numbers independently.
This makes it possible to differentiate the groups as required and to send the information (phone calls, SMSs,
MMSs, etc.) only to the parties who need it. The numbers are the ones configured in the telephone contacts list.
„„ select the checkbox of the telephone number that you want to enable and associate to the group of telephones
you are editing.
DIGITAL COMMUNICATOR TELEPHONES
In this section, for each group of telephones it is possible to associate independently up to four telephone numbers
for digital communication. They are the numbers configured in the digital communicator contacts list. At least
one digital communicator must be selected in the phone groups (group 8 - test - excluded).[Reg. 81]
„„ select the checkbox of the telephone number that you want to enable and associate to the group of telephones
you are editing.
APP
In this section, for each group of telephones, it is possible to associate up to 8 Apps independently. The Apps are the applications configured in
"Phone App".
„„ select the checkbox of the App that you want to enable and associate to the group of telephones you are editing.
CONFIGURATIONS PANEL
AREAS
Areas
Enable MMS
Area 1
Area 2
Area 3
Area 4
Area 5
Area 6
Area 7
Area 8
Enable transmission of MMS
if zone in alarm with
associated camera
Group of checkboxes for selecting the areas whose activity must be notified
by means of the telephone numbers in the selected group. There must
be at least one area selected in the phone groups (group 8 - test - excluded) in
which at least one digital communicator is enabled [Reg. 82]
ENABLE MMS
Checkbox; if selected, enables the transmission of MMSs to the telephones in the selected group, if zones associated with a camera are present on
one or more of the enabled areas.
TAB FOR SELECTING DETAILS OF EVENTS TO SIGNAL
This section enables you to customise in detail the type of information that the system can send by telephone connection (audio messages, digital
messages to monitoring control panel), by GSM connection (audio messages, SMS, email, MMS) and by IP/Internet connection (email), or via local/
remote connection to the Vedo App.
The structure of the configuration is very similar for all the events managed. The only differences relate to the presence or absence of certain
message options.
64
< BACK
< BACK
Example: Areas/system tab
Safetouch
Touch devices
Reset database
Zone alarm
Sabotage
Faults
Bridge
Outputs Actions
Generic
Email - Deactivation
Email - Activation / Forcing
App - Deactivation
App - Activation / Forcing
Digital comm. - Reset
Description
4
5
App
Timer
SMS - Reset
ID
Change codes
Keypad RFID Remote connections
Digital comm. - Activation
Activations
SMS - Activation / Forcing
Zones Areas/System
Total activation
Partial activation 1
• ID: numerical box, uniquely identifies the event.
• Description: alphanumeric box containing the ID of the event.
• SMS - Activation/Forcing checkbox; if selected, enables the transmission of an SMS to activate the selected event.
• SMS - Reset: checkbox; if selected, enables the transmission of an SMS to reset the selected event.
• Digital comm. - Activation: checkbox; if selected, enables transmission of a new event message in digital format (e.g.: Contact ID) for the
selected event. Configure the events according to the table in the appendix [Reg. 83]
• Digital comm. - Reset: checkbox; if selected, enables transmission of a the reset message in digital format (e.g.: Contact ID) for the selected
event. Configure the events according to the table in the appendix [Reg. 83]
• App - Activation/Forcing /App - Deactivation: checkbox; when selected enables the sending of notifications (corresponding to the activation/
forcing or resetting of an event) to mobile devices with the application installed.
• Email - Activation/Forcing: checkbox; if selected, enables the transmission of an email to activate the selected event.
• Email - Reset: checkbox; if selected, enables the transmission of an email to reset the selected event.
3.12.6 Contact-ID Map
For digital communications directed to a monitoring control panel, this section shows a map of the events and related standard codes for which such
communication is envisaged.
In this section you can also modify certain values, to adapt the messages to the characteristics of the monitoring control panel.
Contact-ID Map
ID
ID
Description
1
Command
2
Qualifier
Zone
Zone exclusion
570 Direct
Zone
3
Zone isolation
570 Direct
Zone
4
Total activation
400 Inverse
<None>
456 Inverse
<None>
6
Partial activation 2
456 Inverse
<None>
7
RC Set
404 Inverse
<None>
Alphanumeric box, contains a description of the command to which the parameters in the line correspond.
EVENT CODE
Zone/user
140 Direct
Numerical 5
box, uniquely
the1position of the command in the table.
Partial identifies
activation
DESCRIPTION
Event
code
<None>
Deactivation
400 Direct
8 containing,
Numerical box
by default, the standard code of the selected event. If necessary,
can be modified to be adapted
to possible requests from
the monitoring control panel.
QUALIFIER
Partial activation 1 and 2
9
456 Inverse
<None>
Drop-down menu, configures the procedure for transmission of events to the monitoring control panel.
The possible choices are:
MENU SELECTION TYPE OF NOTIFICATION SENT
Direct
The direction of the command will be coherent with the direction of the event that triggers it: a new activation event will generate an activation command /
new event, and vice versa
Force Activation The direction of the command will always correspond to an activation type event (new event)
Force Reset The direction of the command will always correspond to a reset type event
Inverse
The direction of the command will be coherent with the opposite of the direction of the event that triggers it: a new event will generate a reset command and
vice versa
SELECT ZONE/USER
Drop-down menu for associating, when possible, the zone number or ID of the user at the origin of the event. The field is editable but you are advised
not to change the default setting.
65
< BACK
< BACK
3.12.7 Free voice messages
This section enables you to compose text messages that can be sent in audio form to one or more telephone numbers.
The messages can be entered by means of the configuration PC keyboard and must then be transferred to the messages memory.
Sixteen free messages are available.
Free voice messages
ID Description
Text to speech
1 Message 1
a burglar alarm is in progress
2 Message 2
a fire alarm is in progress
3 Message 3
a robbery alarm is in progress
4 Message 4
a medical emergency alarm is in progress
5 Message 5
6 Message 6
7 Message 7
8 Message 8
RUN TEXT TO SPEECH ON SELECTED MESSAGES
Converts the text of the message, composed in the input lines, into an audio file that can be sent to one or more telephone numbers. The command
only affects messages with the checkbox selected, and has no effect on the others.
TEXT TO SPEECH CONFIGURATION
Opens the voice configuration menu.
DELETE SELECTED AUDIO MESSAGES
Removes the messages whose checkboxes are selected.
ENABLE
Checkbox, allows you to select one or more messages for conversion from text to speech or for deletion.
ID
Numerical box; uniquely identifies the message.
DESCRIPTION
Alphanumeric box, assigns an ID to the message. For example, you might want to change the description "Message 1" into "Burglary Message" for
the purpose of quick identification in the selection menu.
TEXT TO SPEECH
Alphanumeric box for entering the text that you want to convert into an audio message to transmit by telephone.
CHECK MESSAGE
Button, in the form of a yellow loudspeaker, located on the right of the Text to Speech field. The button does not appear until you have converted
the text into audio using the Speaker button in the light blue field. Double-clicking this button starts playing the audio (on the PCs loudspeakers) of
the selected message.
VOICE CONFIGURATION
Text to speech
MSP
SAPI 4
SAPI 5
Available voices
Microsoft Server Speech Text to Speech
Alarm test
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Press the Gearwheel button.
Select the Text to Speech voice synthesis interface.
In the drop-down menu, select the voice you intend to use.
Type any test into the test box (Test alarm in the example).
Press the Test button to hear the audio conversions.
Press OK.
Test
Ok
Cancel
ENTER A FREE VOICE MESSAGE
1. Select a free position and enter the message in the Text to Speech field.
2. Select the checkbox of the message (or messages) to be converted into audio.
3. Press the Speaker button in the light blue field; this done, a button in the form of a yellow loudspeaker will appear on the right of the message
in the Check field.
4. To check the audio message, double-click on the yellow loudspeaker button on the right of the message you intend to listen to.
DELETING ONE OR MORE FREE VOICE MESSAGES
1.
2.
3.
4.
66
Select the checkboxes of the messages you want to delete.
Press the button in the form of a trash can.
Click 'Yes' in the pop-up that opens.
Click “send audio”.
< BACK
< BACK
3.12.8 SMS
This section enables you to compose up to sixteen different text messages that can be sent in SMS form to one or more telephone numbers. The
messages can be entered by means of the configuration PC keyboard and must then be transferred to the messages memory.
SMS
ID
ID
Description
Text
1
Burglary SMS
John Smith's home: a burglar alarm is in progress
2
Sms 2
3
Sms 3
4
Sms 4
Numerical box; uniquely identifies the SMS message.
DESCRIPTION
Alphanumeric box, assigns an ID to the message. For example, you might want to change the description "SMS 1" into "Burglary SMS" for the
purpose of quick identification in the selection menu.
TEXT
Alphanumeric box for entering the text of the SMS message.
3.12.9 Email
The control panel allows you to send up to eight different email messages. You can configure them in this section.
Email
Id
Description
1
Email 1
2
Email 2
Text
ID
Numerical box; uniquely identifies the email message.
DESCRIPTION
Alphanumeric box, assigns an ID to the message. For example, you might want to change the description "Email 1" into "Burglary Email" for the
purpose of quick identification in the selection menu.
TEXT
Alphanumeric box for entering the text of the email message.
3.12.10 Service voice messages
As well as the free voice messages, there are several service messages, which are used by the control panel to suggest standard operations (e.g.
during telephone use of the voice control) or to communicate the system address.
These messages, with the sole exception of System Address message, are fixed and cannot be modified in the Text to Speech field. They can be
deleted as audio however.
Attention: the System Address message is taken automatically from the Address box, to be completed in the System Parameters section. That is
why it is important to configure the system details in the System Parameters section.
Service voice messages
ID Description
Text to speech
1 Reset
Reset
2 Press key 1
Press 1 to listen to the alarm message
3 End call...
Press hash to end call
4 End queue
Press asterisk to end all calls
5 Access menus
Press zero to enter voice menu
6 System address
Via Umberto Mario
The operation of the section and its respective buttons are totally identical to those of the Free Voice Messages section. The only difference is the
treatment of the System Address message.
CONFIGURE THE SYSTEM ADDRESS MESSAGE
1. Complete the System Coordinates section in "System parameters" (see "3.14 System Parameters" on page 70), at least in relation to the
system address field.
2. Go to the Service Voice Messages section and make sure that the text of the system address has appeared in position 6 - System Address - in
the Text to Speech field.
3. Select the checkbox for message 6 to convert it into audio.
4. Press the Speaker button in the light blue field; this done, a button in the form of a yellow loudspeaker will appear on the right of the message
in the Check field.
5. To check the audio message, double-click on the yellow loudspeaker button on the right of the message you intend to listen to.
67
< BACK
< BACK
3.13 TIMETABLE PROGRAMMER
This section allows you to configure Timers and timed or automatic activations. The timers relate mainly to time-dependent authorisations (e.g. you can
enable keypads to perform operations only within certain timeframes) and conditions on outputs.
3.13.1 Timer
The control panel provides eight different timer configurations. Each configuration is associated with up to sixteen possible configurable timeframe
timers. The figure shows only 9 for the sake of convenience.
Timer
ID Description
ID
Description
START 1
STOP 1
1 Activation
1
office area
07:00
21:00
2 Timer 2 Type
2
04:00
23:00
3 Timer 3 Type
4 Timer 4 Type
5 Timer 5 Type
6 Timer 6 Type
3
4
5
warehouse
START 2
STOP 2
START 3 STOP 3
START 4
STOP 4
Timer 3
Timer 4
Timer 5
6
Timer 6
7 Timer 7 Type
7
Timer 7
8 Timer 8 Type
8
Timer 8
STATUS/DESCRIPTION PANEL
ID
Numerical box; uniquely identifies the timer.
DESCRIPTION
Alphanumeric box, assigns an ID to the timer. For example, you might want to change the description "Timer Type 1" into "Activation" for the purpose
of quick identification in the subsequent selection menus.
PANEL FOR GROUPING TIMED ACTIVATION/DEACTIVATION OF TIMERS
ID
Numerical box; uniquely identifies the specific timer.
ENABLE
Checkbox; when selected, enables operation of the selected timer.
DESCRIPTION (TIMER TYPE)
Alphanumeric box, assigns an ID to the specific timer. For example, you might want to change the description "Timer 1" into "Office Area" for quick
identification. Each timer (you can configure up to sixteen for each timer configuration) has up to four Timer On/Off cycles, whose trigger times can
be freely configured.
ONX
Time box, for entering the start time of interval x.
OFFX
Time box, for entering the end time of interval x.
PANEL FOR PERIODS/CALENDAR MANAGEMENT SECTION
See description “Panel for Periods/calendar management section” on page 98.
68
< BACK
< BACK
3.13.2 Activations
In this section it will be possible to configure any programmed activations.
Up to eight different activation profiles can be configured. Each profile can operate on eight areas simultaneously, and for each area, eight
independent and programmable timeframes are available.
Activations
Forced
1 Working day
Enabled
ID Description
Control
Area
ON1
Action 1
ON2
Action 2
ON3
Action 3
ON4
Action 4
2 Holiday
3 Garden
Control panel
Input
21:00 Total
None
None
4 Activation type 4
Control panel
Area 2
None
None
None
Supervisor
None
Area 3
None
None
None
None
6 Activation type 6
Control panel
Area 4
None
None
None
None
7 Activation type 7
Control panel
Area 5
None
None
None
None
8 Activation type 8
Control panel
5 Activation type 5
STATUS/DESCRIPTION PANELControl panel
Control panel
07:00 Deactivation
Area 6
None
None
None
None
Area 7
None
None
None
None
Area 8
None
None
None
None
ID
Numerical box; uniquely identifies the timer.
DESCRIPTION
Alphanumeric box, assigns an ID to the timer. For example, you might want to change the description "Timer Type 1" into "Activation" for the purpose
of quick identification in the subsequent selection menus.
PANEL FOR GROUPING TIMED ACTIVATION/DEACTIVATION OF ACTIVATIONS
ENABLED
Checkbox; when selected, enables operation of the profile for the selected area.
FORCED
Checkbox; when selected, enables forcing for the selected area. When the timed automatic activation is activated a pre-alert buzzer will be heard
on the control device (if configured correctly on the keypad, Safetouch or touch device with the "Buzzer/Enabled" and "Buzzer/Pre-alert" flags).
CONTROL
Drop-down menu, allows you to choose for each area, whether control will be assigned to the control panel or to a supervisor. Not currently
implemented, leave default setting (control panel).
AREA
Alphanumeric box, shows the name assigned to the area in the Areas menu.
ON1
Time box, for setting the time at which the event shown in the Action 1 column will be generated. In general form, applies to all eight time boxes from
ON1 to ON8.
ACTION 1
Drop-down menu, allows you to select one of the available events (vedi tabella a pag 89) to be performed at the time set in the ON 1 column. In
general form, applies to all eight action boxes, from Action 1 to Action 8.
PANEL FOR PERIODS/CALENDAR MANAGEMENT SECTION
See description “Panel for Periods/calendar management section” on page 98.
69
< BACK
< BACK
3.14 SYSTEM PARAMETERS
System parameters
Presence of expansions
GSM
Audio
PSTN
Domotics
Network card (Ip)
Intercom
PRESENCE OF EXPANSIONS
Includes 6 independent checkboxes for enabling any expansions that may be present on the control panel. The check mark in the checkbox
enables the peripheral, which would not otherwise be considered, even if present. If you enable a peripheral that is not present, after transfer of the
programming to the control panel, system errors may be indicated.
• GSM: refers to the GSM expansion card.
At least one of the options PSTN, GSM or IP must be enabled [Reg. 98]
• PSTN: refers to the telephone interface supplied as standard. If it is enabled, but the telephone line is not present, an anomaly will be generated.
At least one of the options PSTN, GSM or IP must be enabled [Reg. 98]
• Network card (IP): refers to the IP expansion card. If it is present and enabled, but there is no IP connection, an anomaly is generated.
• Audio: refers to the messages expansion module. If enabled but not present, it generates an anomaly.
At least one of the options PSTN, GSM
or IP must be enabled [Reg. 98]
• Domotics: not implemented.
• Intercom: not implemented.
Options
Language
Italiano
RS485 bus speed
38400
Forced activation Level 2 (anomalies)
Forced activation Level 2 (sabotage)
Activation with monitor fault (radio)
Activation with battery fault (radio)
Failed activation fault
Enabling sabotage and fault tests for zones
Buzzer in partial
Sound in panic
Restore factory settings
Total
Permanently enable installer code
Voice guide for telephone communicator
Obbligo cambio codici di default
OPTIONS
• Language: drop-down menu, allows you to set the user interface language (on-screen menus and messages).
• RS485 bus speed: drop-down menu, allows you to select the speed of the RS485 communication bus, from between 9600 and 115200 baud.
The standard is 38400 baud.
• Forced activation Level 2 (faults): checkbox; if selected, allows a user to force an activation in the presence of anomalies. This operation
degrades the performance of the control panel at grade 2. If deselected, allows the user to perform only the
following forced activations (in presence of faults):
Faults:
•
•
•
•
Faults
Zone fault
Radio control fault
Power supply unit battery fault
Selected [Reg. 94]
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
No power supply unit network
Radio control battery fault
Camera fault
Remote communication failed
Robbery zone fault
Failed activation fault
IP Expansion fault from bus
• Forced activation level 2 (sabotage): checkbox; if selected, allows a user to force an activation in the presence of sabotage. This operation
degrades the performance of the control panel at grade 2. If deselected, allows the user to perform only
the following forced activations (in presence of alarms/sabotage):
Alarms:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Sabotage:
Burglar
• Activations in the presence of sabotage
H24
can be forced only by installers
Fire
Panic
Robbery
Flooding
Gas
Medical
All the alarms if the zones can be excluded
Selected [Reg. 95] NOT selected [Incert]
70
< BACK
< BACK
• Activation with monitoring fault (radio): c heckbox; if selected, allows activation of the system even if there is a radio sensors monitoring
anomaly. The system must be activated by forcing. Must be selected if active radio sensors are
present [Reg. 93]
• Activation with battery fault (radio): checkbox; if selected, allows activation of the system even if there is a radio device battery anomaly. The
system must be activated by forcing.
• Failed activation fault checkbox; if selected, the immediate burglar zones and/or the delayed burglar zones at output (which cannot be
excluded) can stop the activation of an area if they are still open at the end of the output time. An activation failed fault
will be generated on the area that has not finished the activation procedure. Instead, if the flag is deselected a burglar
alarm will be generated on the area in both cases. Selected [Reg. 99]
• Enabling sabotage and zone fault tests if the flag is selected, the zone test mode will also be extended to sabotage and zone fault. If the flag
is deselected, the test mode of a zone will be active only for the alarm event. Selected [Reg. 100]
• Buzzer in partial: checkbox; if selected, enables the control devices to audibly indicate the output time during a partial activation.
• Sound in panic: checkbox; if selected, allows a panic alarm to be associated with the activation of the sounders (sirens).
• Restore factory settings: drop-down menu, allows you to choose either NO (do not allow), PARTIAL (allow partially) or YES (allow in full) for
the purposes of resetting the system parameters.
• Permanently enable installer code: checkbox; if selected, does not allow timed expiry of the installer code: once an installer code has been
authorised for the first time, it will remain authorised until the check mark is removed and the programmed
data are subsequently transferred to the control panel.
NOT Selected [Reg. 100]
• Voice guide for telephone communicator: checkbox; if selected, allows the use of voice menu during interaction from a telephone line
(conventional or GSM), thereby making it possible to interact by means of audio messages
transmitted by the communicator and reply with DTMF tones generated by the telephone in use.
The voice control must be transferred to the messages module at the time of programming.
• Default codes change mandatory: checkbox, when selected, the control panel performs a default code check, preventing any activations
while the user codes and installer codes are the same as the default codes (user: 111111, master: 001961).
The control panel will only start working once the user and master codes have been customised (at which
point it will also be possible to carry out activations). Selected [Reg. 132]
CONTROL DEVICES
Control devices
Lock due to wrong code and/or false password
Code entry errors
3
Reactivation time (minutes)
2
Devices password
*
• Lock due to wrong code or false key: if selected, locks the device when the set number of "code errors" is reached.
Selected [Reg. 92]
• Code entry errors: numerical box for setting the number of consecutive code entry errors that will cause the timed lockout of the control device.
Max 10 [Reg. 88]
• Reactivation time (minutes): numerical box for setting the temporary lockout time for the control device (keypad, RFID reader, Planux,
Minitouch...) that generated the maximum permitted number of code entry errors. Min 2 min [Reg. 89]
• Devices password: a system-specific numerical value for differentiating the devices by associating them to a specific system. The number
must be between 0 and 65535.
• System coordinates: 3 alphanumeric fields for containing the serial n°, address and name of customer to whom the system is registered. The
serial number is not editable and is the number for the specific card. The customer name field must be completed [Reg.
84] The system address field must be completed [Reg. 85]
• Database Version: numerical, provides information about the version of data management in the database (and hence in the data flash
memory) of that particular system. Different databases are not compatible with each other.
SYSTEM TIMES
• Chime duration (seconds): numerical box, allows you to set the duration in seconds of the sounding of a zone configured as Bell.
• Network alarm signalling delay (hh:mm:ss): time box, allows you to set the alarm delay caused by a power outage. On expiry of this time
an alarm will be generated, and if programmed, messages will be sent (SMS, voice, email). No
alarm will be generated if the situation returns to normal before expiry of the timer. Max 60
sec [Reg. 86]
• Battery alarm signalling delay (hh:mm:ss): time box, allows you to set the alarm delay caused by a battery fault. On expiry of this time an
alarm will be generated, and if programmed, messages will be sent (SMS, voice, email). No alarm
will be generated if the situation returns to normal before expiry of the timer. Max 5 min [Reg. 87]
• Zones testing time (days): numerical box, allows you to set the time, expressed in days, during which one or more zones configured in Test
mode, will not be able to generate alarms when the system is active, but only records for the events log. Test
mode is useful for checking the behaviour of zones whose correct operation is in doubt, while avoiding generating
unforeseen alarm cycles. There is just one test time, and it is associated to all the test zones. On expiry of this time,
all the zones will return to normal operation and will be able to generate fully effective alarms. If a zone is put into
test mode after the timer has already been activated for a different zone, the timer will restart from zero, thereby
prolonging the test time for all zones involved. To put zones in test mode, select the Test checkbox in the Attributes
section of the individual zones, whether radio or wired.
71
< BACK
< BACK
• Unlimited: checkbox, for putting no limit on the test time: the zones in test mode will remain in test mode until taken out of test mode.
• Maximum number of overtime requests: numerical box for setting the maximum number of overtime requests (which equate to an activation
delay requested by a user) that can be made before automatic activation.
• Duration of single overtime period: numerical box for setting the duration of a single overtime cycle, which can be activated at the request
of a user.
• Burglar alarm verified: a burglar alarm verified occurs when two separate burglar zones go into alarm status within a specific time
• Burglar alarm time verified: if greater than zero, the burglar alarm verified function is activated
• System verified burglar alarm: If selected, the alarm is verified in case any two burglar zones go into alarm
status within the time specified in the previous parameter. If deselected, to have a verified alarm two burglar
alarms belonging to the same area must go into alarm status within the time specified in the previous parameter.
FAULT CYCLES
• Unlimited: checkbox; if selected, there is no limit on the number of fault cycles that can be generated per activation cycle.
Selected [Reg. 91]
• Time: numerical box; if the Unlimited checkbox is not selected, this box enables you to set a limit to the number of fault cycles that can be
generated, measured between one activation and the next.
ALARM CYCLES
• Unlimited: checkbox; if selected, there is no limit on the number of alarm cycles that can be generated per activation cycle.
Selected [Reg. 90]
• Time: numerical box; if the Unlimited checkbox is not selected, this box enables you to set a limit to the number of alarm cycles that can be
generated, measured between one activation and the next.
DATE AND TIME
• Alphanumeric Date and Time box: allows you to set a date and time to send to the control panel, or to read the date and time of the control
panel. You can also change the date and time manually: simply select the field to be edited with the
mouse, and enter the new data. The value is static and is not modified by the passage of time.
• Set: button for sending the system date and time to the control panel. Date and time correspond to the date and time of the computer in use
for configuration.
• Read: button, allows reading of the date and time from the control panel and display of the value read in the alphanumeric Date and Time box
• Automatic switch to/from daylight saving time: checkbox, for European countries only; if selected, allows the control panel to update the time
automatically in response to changes to and from daylight saving time.
• Time difference: for correct interpretation of the GMT time data.
FIRMWARE VERSION
• Read: button, for reading the firmware revision from the switchboard and displaying it in the box below.
INSTALLER AUTHORISATION
• Run: button for enabling the installer code. This operation is essential for the purposes of configuring the system. Pressing the button opens
an access form: enter a valid authorised user code,‌then press Login. If the operation is successful, it is possible to transfer data to and
from the control panel. If the user is not authorised to perform the operation, authorise the installer from the keypad, see "Enabling a level
3 user (via keypad)" on page 47.
MANUFACTURER AUTHORISATION
• Run: button for enabling the manufacturer code. This operation is essential for the purposes of updating the system. Pressing the button opens
an access form: enter a valid authorised installer code,‌then press Login. If the operation is successful, it is possible to operate on the
control panel.
RESTORE FACTORY DEFAULT
• Partial: resets the factory-set codes of the control panel (User Code: 111111, Master Installer Code: 001961).
• Total: resets the factory configuration of the control panel.
• Set: saves the current configurations as factory default.
• Restart: generates a restart command.
72
< BACK
< BACK
3.15 EVENTS LOG
The events log can record up to 1024 standard-compliant events, 1024 generic events and 8 events of “first zone event” type on a non-volatile memory.
First Zone type events refer to the first zone in the area to which they belong, and amount to one per potentially used area.
For each of the three types of event, once you have filled all the locations assigned to recording, subsequent records of mandatory and generic events will
rewrite the non-volatile memory, starting from the oldest events.
If necessary, at each activation cycle, the first zone events will rewrite the individual event in the specific area position.
The events log can only be imported, and the memory to which it is saved is not editable.
3.15.1 Events Log
CSV
Events
log
Button for exporting the events log for analysis/printing by means of an external editor. The format is such that the exported data are separated from
each other by commas (comma-separated values).
Unique
Date EVENTS LOGLog Type
RE-ANALYSE
Events
log ID CURRENT
Event
type
Event subtype
Event
Mask
Button,
allows you06/11/2030
to update
the descriptions of events, if,
after importation,
the descriptions of peripheral,
zones, Area
etc. 1,
have
been modified.
1124073516
23:0... Events memory
Areas
Generic
Reset alarms
Area 2, Area 3, Area 4, Area 5, Area 6, Area 7, Ar
1124073517
06/11/2030 23:0... Events memory
Anomaly
Expansion fault...
Event System
Event subtype
Event
Mask
Unique
ID EVENTS Date
Log Type
FILTER
type
1124073518
06/11/2030 23:0... Events memory
System
Generic
Alarm memory...
Button,
allows
you
to
perform
an
advanced
search
combining
the
"filters"
of
the
columns
log
type,
event
type,
event subtype, event, mask, agent
1124073516
06/11/2030 23:0... Events memory
Areas
Generic
Reset alarms
Area 1, Area 2, Area 3, Area 4, Area 5, Area 6, Area 7, Area 8
type,
agent. Choose
the filters
of the
individual
and press the Generic
# icon to start the advanced
search.
1124073519
Events
memory columns System
06/11/2030
23:0...
Programming...
1124073517
06/11/2030 23:0... Events memory
System
Anomaly
Expansion fault...
KEY TO COLOURS
1124073520
06/11/2030 23:0... Generic event
Output
Output events
Output ON
O. centr.unit 1
1124073518
memory
23:0...
System
Genericrecorded:
Alarm memory...
Each line is 06/11/2030
highlighted
with Events
a colour
which indicates
the type of event
1124073521
06/11/2030 23:0... Generic event
Output
Output events
Output ON
O. centr.unit 2
red: identifies
sabotage events
1124073519 • 06/11/2030
Eventsand
memory
23:0... alarm
System
Generic
Programming...
1124073522
Events
memory
06/11/2030
23:0...
Areas
Generic
Area 1, Area 2, Area 3, Area 4, Area 5, Area 6, Area 7, Ar
• green:
identifies
general
events.
1124073520
06/11/2030 23:0... Generic event
Output
Output events
Output ON
O. centr.unit 1
•
yellow:
identifies
fault
and
test
events
1124073523
06/11/2030 23:0... Events memory
Areas
Generic
Reset alarms
Area 1, Area 2, Area 3, Area 4, Area 5, Area 6, Area 7, Ar
1124073521
event
23:0... Generic
Output
Output events
Output ON
O. centr.unit 2
• 06/11/2030
white: identifies
first zone
events
1124073524
06/11/2030 23:0... Events memory
System
Generic
Alarm memory...
1124073522
06/11/2030 23:0... Events memory
Areas
Generic
Area 1, Area 2, Area 3, Area 4, Area 5, Area 6, Area 7, Area 8
CONTENTS
1124073525
06/11/2030 23:0... Events memory
System
Generic
Programming...
Numerical
box;
incremental
event
number.
1124073523
06/11/2030 23:0... Events memory
Areas
Generic
Reset alarms
Area 1, Area 2, Area 3, Area 4, Area 5, Area 6, Area 7, Area 8
1124073526
06/11/2030 23:0... Events memory
System
Anomaly
EVENT
1124073524
06/11/2030 23:0... Events memory
System
Generic
Alarm memory...
Alphanumeric
description
of the
event
type recorded.
For example:
General:
"Fault:
1124073527 box,
Generic
event
06/11/2030
23:0...
Output
Output
events"Alarm Memory",
Output
ON Date lost"
O. centr.unit 2
1124073525
Events
memory
06/11/2030 23:0...
System
Generic
Programming...
MASK
1124073528
06/11/2030 23:0... Events memory
System
Anomaly
Alphanumeric
box; where
by the event,System
identifies the logical
1124073526
Events memory
06/11/2030
23:0...envisaged
Anomalyorigin of the event. By way of example only, Area 1, Area 2 in the case of a
burglar alarm, or User 1 in the case of an activation or deactivation.
1124073527
DATE
06/11/2030 23:0... Generic event
Output
Output events
Output ON
O. centr.unit 2
1124073528
Events
06/11/2030
23:0...and
System
Date box, shows
the date
timememory
at which the event
described Anomaly
in the line occurred
AGENT
Alphanumeric box; shows the operator who generated the event. For example Wired Zone 1 in the case of a burglar alarm, or Digital Key in the
case of an activation.
73
< BACK
< BACK
3.15.2 Events to be saved
In this section, it is possible to choose which events to save in the events memory, for subsequent analysis. Detailed selection of the individual events
that can be saved, makes it possible to increase the level of detail of the records while reducing the maximum retention period or, conversely, to
reduce the level of detail of the records while extending the available retention time, assuming the same conditions of system use.
The structure of the configuration tables is the same for all the events managed.
Two tabs, under the name Areas/System and Actions, manage a large number of selectable events. To simplify their configuration, they are equipped
with sub-tabs which divide the options into homogeneous subgroups with respect to the events that can be selected and, at the same time, simplify
their management and checking.
Events to save
Safetouch
Touch devices
Activations
Zone alarms
Change codes
App
Bridge
Zones Areas/System Keypad RFID Remote connections Timer Outputs
Actions
Sabotage Anomalies Generic
Set
ID
ID
Description
4
Total activation
5
Partial activation 1
6
Partial activation 2
7
RC Set
8
Deactivation
9
Partial activation 1 and 2
Numerical box, uniquely identifies the event.
DESCRIPTION
alphanumeric box containing the ID of the event.
SET
Checkbox; if selected, enables recording of the event at the time it occurs.
RESET
Checkbox; if selected, enables recording of the event at the time it is reset.
Configure the events to be saved according to the table in the appendix [Reg. 101]
The complete list of all the events that can be saved is available on page 97.
74
< BACK
< BACK
4. System Verification
This chapter will show how to:
• check the system status using the function "Control panel check (Real
Time)"
• verify the system configurations for grade 2 certification to ENEN50131
and "EN50131 grade 2 + incert" using the function “Verify compliance..."
CONTROL PANEL ALARMS/SABOTAGE
Element Parameters
Alarms
4.1 CONTROL PANEL CHECK (REAL TIME)
This function allows you to check the system status in real time.
Providing for each element information on the status of every single
parameter.
Sabotage
Signals:
general signal
presence of anomalies, sabotage or faults
peripheral active
presence of alarms or peripheral absent
•
•
•
•
Burglar
24H
Fire
Panic
•
•
•
•
Robbery
Flooding
Gas
Medical
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Wire zones tamper
Siren/radio output tamper
Radio device jamming
Tamper free 0
Tamper free 1
Tamper free 2
Tamper free 3
Tamper free 4
BUS I/O expansion tamper
BUS keypad tamper
BUS RFID tamper
BUS Minitouch tamper
BUS Planux tamper
BUS power supply station/
isolator tamper
• BUS Radio expansion tamper
• BUS siren tamper
• Alarm communication device
tamper
• IP expansion tamper
• IP video expansion tamper
• Tamper bus free_0
• Tamper_bus_free_1
• Tamper_bus_free_2
• Tamper_bus_free_3
• Tamper_bus_free_4
• Remote communication
tamper
• GSM jamming
• False code
ANOMALIES
Element Parameters
Areas anomalies
Below is the list of the parameters verified:
ZONES - OUTPUTS - AREAS
Element Parameters
Zones
Output
Area
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Open
Alarm
Fault
Sabotage
Not ready **
ON
Chime
Excluded
Isolated *
Absent *
Active
Testing
• Masked
• Battery low ***
• Monitored ***
• Fault - inactivity
• inhibited
* with isolated condition and absent
at 0 means that the zone is active.
** valorised only if the conditions for
activation are present
*** radio only
•
•
•
•
•
•
on
off
absent*
isolated*
fault
tamper**
• battery low**
• monitoring
* with isolated condition and absent
at 0 means that the zone is active.
** radio only
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Deactivated
Activated in total
Activated in p1
Activated in p2
Not ready for activation
In alarm
Sabotage in progress
Anomaly
Alarm log
Not ready for total activation
•
•
•
•
Not ready for p1 activation
Not ready for p2 activation
Alarm in progress
Zones excluded on the area
(sabotage, anomaly, zone or
zones testing)
• Input active time
• Output active time
CONTROL DEVICES
System
Anomalies
RFID reader
Safetouch
Touch devices
75
•
•
•
•
Active
Isolated
Absent
No input tamper
• Bus error
• Supply voltage error
• Device locking in progress
• Active
• Isolated
• Absent
• No input tamper
• Bus error
• Device locking in progress
•
•
•
•
•
• Supply voltage error
• Output short circuit
• Device locking in progress
Active
Isolated
Absent
No input tamper
Bus error
• Bus expansion telephone
line fault
• IO expansion fault
• Keypad fault
• RFID reader fault
• Safetouch fault
• Touch device fault
• Isolator power supply station
from bus
• Radio concentrator fault
from bus
• Siren fault from bus
• Alarm communication device
fault
• IP expansion fault
• IP video expansion fault
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Bus fuse fault
Siren fuse fault
Voltage low
Control panel bus fault
Telephone line bus fault
No GSM network
No GPRS network
Date and time not set
Control panel battery
Mains power supply
PSTN fault
GSM fault
IP fault
Voice synthesis fault
Intercom fault
Domotics fault
AUX fuse fault
EXPANSIONS
Element Parameters
Expansion
•
•
•
•
Outputs shorting
V+ aux voltage error
Power supply voltage error
Bus error
•
•
•
•
No input tamper
Absent
Isolated
Active
Radio expansion
•
•
•
•
Technical fault
Input voltage low
485 bus communication
Jamming
•
•
•
•
Tamper
Absent
Isolated
Active
GSM
•
•
•
•
No GSM expansion card
No SIM
GSM antenna fault
No GSM network
• No GPRS network
• Sabotage - Jamming
• SIM expired
Power supply
units
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Output 03 short circuit
Output 02 short circuit
Output O1 short circuit
230/110 V supply error
Battery error
Aux 2 voltage error
Aux 1 voltage error
Output voltage error
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Isolators
•
•
•
•
Output voltage error
Input voltage error
Input bus error
Tamper
• Absent
• Isolated
• Active
Element Parameters
Keypad
• Bus siren fuse fault
• Radio control fault
• Bus power supply unit fuse
fault
• Bus power supply unit battery
• Radio siren battery
• Bus siren battery
• Bus power supply network
• Radio zone battery
• Radio control battery
• Bus expansion input voltage
level anomalous
• Bus expansion output voltage
level anomalous
• Zones rx monitoring
• Sirens rx monitoring
• Output fault
• Camera fault
• No bus expansion GSM GPRS
network
Input voltage error
Supply voltage error
Bus error
Tamper
Absent
Isolated
Active
< BACK
< BACK
1. Click on the alarm condition, activation, command that you
want to verify (e.g.: Activations/Total activation).
ETH EXPANSIONS
Element Parameters
Ip card
•
•
•
•
•
No Link
No Internet
No SD
DHCP error
NTP error
•
•
•
•
DDNS error
SMTP error
Card presence error
Timeout
Palip
•
•
•
•
•
•
Fault cameras 4
Fault cameras 3
Fault cameras 2
Fault cameras 1
Database mismatch
Configuration reading error
•
•
•
•
•
SD card fault
Timeout Keep Alive
Absent
Isolated
Active
Bridge
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Input voltage abnormal
SMTP error
DDNS error
NTP error
DHCP error
SD card error
Internet error
Link error (ethernet)
•
•
•
•
•
•
Device locking in progress
Bus error
No input tamper
Absent
Isolated
Active
2. Press "run" to startd the condition. In the case of activations:
it is possible to carry out forced/immediate activations by
selecting the appropriate flag.
4.1.1 Launch control panel check function (Real Time)
„„ Click on the "Tools" menu, choose "Control panel check (Real
Time)”, enter the installer code (default=001961) and press OK
to confirm.
Safe Manager
Project
View
Tool
Windows
Help
Options
Updating firmware...
Control unit check (Real Time)
Scan System...
Send audio
Receive events log
Verification regulation...
„„ Press "Run" to start the real time check function (press "stop"
if you want to stop scanning, press close to exit the real time
check function).
4.1.2 Control panel check (Real Time) in alarm condition, activation, command
By means of the panel at top left (activations/alarms/commands)
it is possible to verify the system status in different conditions of
alarm, activation, command; below is the list of conditions that can
be verified.
Condition
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Scenario P1
Scenario P2
Scenario P1+P2
Scenario 4
Scenario 5
Scenario 6
Scenario 7
Scenario 8
Scenario 9
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Alarms
•
•
•
•
Burglar
Fire
Panic
Robbery
• Flooding
• Gas
• Medical
Commands
•
•
•
•
Authorise installer
Reset alarms
Reset phone calls
Request support
• Stop
• Alarms
• Extraordinary
Activations
76
Activations
Scenario 10
Scenario 11
Scenario 12
Scenario 13
Scenario 14
Scenario 15
Scenario 16
Total activation
Total deactivation
< BACK
< BACK
4.2 CONFORMANCE VERIFICATION (EN50131 GRADE
2 / EN50131 GRADE 2 + INCERT)
This function allows you to verify whether the system configuration conforms
to standards (EN50131 grade 2 / EN50131 grade 2 + incert)
4.2 1 Run the function Conformance verification
(EN50131 grade 2 / EN50131 grade 2 + incert)
1. Click on the "Tools" menu, choose “Conformance verification
(EN50131 grade 2 / EN50131 grade 2 + incert) ”, and enter the
installer code (default=001961) and press OK to confirm.
Safe Manager
Project
View
Tool
Windows
Help
Options
Updating firmware...
Control unit check (Real Time)
Scan System...
Send audio
Receive events log
Verification regulation...
EN50131 (grade 2)
EN50131 (grade 2) + INCERT
2. Press "Verify" to start the "Conformance verification (EN50131
grade 2 / EN50131 grade 2 + incert)” function.
»» An icon will appear next to each configuration rule indicating
whether the parameter complies with the standards (EN50131
grade 2 / EN50131 grade 2 + incert).
Signals:
onfiguration conforms to standards (EN50131 grade 2 / EN50131
C
grade 2 + incert)
Warning
onfiguration does not conform to standards (EN50131
C
grade 2 / EN50131 grade 2 + incert)
„„ Press "Show only infringed rules and warnings" to view only the
configuration errors and the warnings.
AUTOMATIC CONFIGURATION OF EVENTS TO BE SAVED.
1. Press
"Events to be saved" for automatic configuration of
the events to be saved according to standard.
2. Confirm to start correction.
77
< BACK
< BACK
5. Appendix
5.1 PORT FORWARDING FOR REMOTE CONNECTION
A. For remote management of the Vedo control panel via Safe Manager,
open the router ports card for the IP address of the control panel
network
B. For remote use of the Vedo App, open the router ports to:
• the IP address of the control panel network card.
• the IP address of the first Pal-IP (if present).
• the IP address of the second Pal-IP (if present).
External
port
(default*)
Internal
port
(default*)
TO
B
Port
√
√
HTTP
(for access to
WEB pages)
80
80
TCP
443
TCP
√
HTTPS or
(for secure
access to WEB
pages)
443
√
10022
TCP
√
TLS
(for secure communication over
TCP/IP networks)
10022
√
or
TCP
(protocol for communication over
TCP/IP networks)
10012
10012
TCP
30012
10012
TCP
√
GRAB
(for capturing
screenshots
using the Vedo
application)
49110
49110
UDP
√
STREAMING
(for streaming
data transmission via Vedo
application)
√
CSP
(Comelit Signalling Protocol)
24104
24104
UDP
30013
10012
TCP
√
GRAB
(for capturing
screenshots
using the Vedo
application)
49111
49111
UDP
√
STREAMING
(for streaming
data transmission via Vedo
application)
√
CSP
(Comelit Signalling Protocol)
24105
24105
UDP
√
Protocol
IP Address
Control
panel network card
4. Search for the sections "Port Opening" or "Apps and games" or "Port
Forwarding" (if not displayed on the main menu, search for them in
Advanced settings) and add the ports you wish to configure.
5. Fill in the configuration panel (see example in the figure below):
a. Enter the name of the port you want to open.
b. Select the desired protocol (TCP or UDP).
c. For the external port, enter a desired value which has not been
used for ports opened previously (the value should then be entered
in SafeManager for remote connection on "3.11.1 IP Options"
on page 50or listed in the Vedo App settings, in the remote
connection parameters section)**.
For the internal port, enter the default value or the value
configured via Safe Manager software*.
If requested, enter the same value in Start and in End if you wish to
open a single port.
The internal ports corresponding to the Pal-IP modules are
fixed and therefore not freely configurable.
d. Enter the IP address of the device for which you wish to open the
ports on the router (Control panel network card/First Pal-IP module/
Second Pal-IP module).
e. Confirm.
f. Repeat the procedure for each port you wish to open.
* The ports opened on the router must correspond to those
configured via Safe Manager and/or via the App.
** To resolve problems regarding a few router models, we
recommend using an external port value which is equal to the
internal port value.
NOT
necessary for
Vedo App
First Pal-IP
module
Second PalIP module
The port forwarding procedure is described below:
1. Connect the PC to the router to which the Vedo control panel will be
connected.
2. Access the browser and enter the IP address of the router (this can
be found in the router user manual) in the navigation bar, for example:
192.168.1.1.
3. Log in by entering the username and password (these can be found in
the router user manual).
The port configuration method may differ according to the brand and
type of router used.
78
< BACK
< BACK
5.2 COMELIT DNS REGISTRATION PROCEDURE FOR VEDOIP EXPANSION
An Internet connection is required for this procedure.
√√ The device must be connected to the same network as the control panel.
1. Open your browser (from a PC, tablet, smartphone...).
2. Enter the IP Address (default: 192.168.1.230) assigned to the VEDOIP expansion device (via the "IP Options" configuration screen) in the address bar
and press return.
IP Options
Options
Network Time Protocol Options
Check presence of connection to internet
Enable NTP
Enable DHCP (obtain IP address automatically)
IP Address
192,168. 1 .230
Subnet mask
»» The control panel web
Gateway
Primary DNS
NTP Server
Secondary DNS
Dynamic DNS
Enable DDNS (Dynamic DNS)
255,255,255.
0
page
will open:
Comelit VEDO
192,168. 1 . 1
D-DNS provider
192,168. 1 . 1
Port
comelitdns.com
80
Host name
0.0.0.0
Username
Host name
HOME
pool.ntp.org
Password
SETUP
Services configuration
http/https ports type
Standard
SETUP
80 password and confirm.
http port
3. Press
, enter the user/installer
4. Press
DNS registration".443
https"Comelit
port
tls port
10022
Configuration
SETUP
10012
TCP Port
SMTP options
Configuration
Enter User Password
Enable installer
Enable SMTP
Enable manufacturer
Server address
Port
25
Use SSL
Update product
Comelit DNS registration:
Email
Username
Password
Email subject
DDNS code: 0004A35542EE
Activation code: 9314DEB308D47B0C
Firmware: @5715:5742M
IP address: 192.168.1.230
Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0
Gateway: 192.168.1.1
Primary DNS: 192.168.1.1
Secondary DNS: 0.0.0.0
MAC address: 00:04:A3:55:42:EE
Connected
»» The Product registration screen on the website www.comelitdns.com will open:
5. Complete the user registration (making a note of the data entered, which you will need to complete step 7).
79
< BACK
< BACK
6. Press
to continue with "product registration".
»» Product registration via the website comelitdns.com is complete!
7. Return to the "IP Options" configuration screen in Safe Manager, tick "Enable DDNS (Dynamic DNS)" and enter the host name (including "comelitdns.
com"), email address and password entered during registration on the websitecomelitdns.com (see step 5) in the "Host name", "Username" and
"Password" fields.
IP Options
Options
Network Time Protocol Options
Check presence of connection to internet
Enable NTP
Enable DHCP (obtain IP address automatically)
NTP Server
IP Address
192,168. 1 .230
Subnet mask
255,255,255. 0
Gateway
192,168. 1 . 1
D-DNS provider
192,168. 1 . 1
Port
Primary DNS
Secondary DNS
pool.ntp.org
Dynamic DNS
Enable DDNS (Dynamic DNS)
comelitdns.com
80
Host name
0.0.0.0
Username
Host name
Password
Services configuration
http/https ports type
http port
https port
Standard
80
443
tls port
10022
TCP Port
10012
SMTP options
Enable SMTP
Server address
Port
25
Use SSL
Email
Username
Password
Email subject
80
< BACK
5.3 CONFIGURATIONS NECESSARY TO
GUARANTEE GRADE 2 CERTIFICATION
ACCORDING TO EN50131-1
This chapter provides indications on the configuration parameters which,
if varied, could lower the safety level of the system, and the configurations
necessary to guarantee I&HAS certification.
For further details on programming and configuration, consult
the programming technical manual.
5.3.5 Isolators
Vedo10 x: from 1 to 4 / Vedo34 x: from 1 to 8 / Vedo68 x: from 1 to 16 / Vedo200 x: from 1 to 16
Indices
Parameters
1.1.1.9.x.2
1.1.1.9.x.3
1.1.1.9.x.4
1.1.1.9.x.5
1.1.1.9.x.7
1.1.1.9.x.8
1.1.1.9.x.10
1.1.1.9.x.11
1.1.1.9.x.13
Tamper areas
Technical areas
Tamper cycles
Technical cycles
Unlimited tamper cycles
Unlimited technical cycles
Send email
Send digital communications
Tamper enabled
Configurations necessary to guarantee
Grade 2 certification
At least one selected area
At least one selected area
Unlimited
Unlimited
Selected
Selected
Selected
Selected
Selected
5.3.1 Keypads
5.3.6 Radio expansion
Vedo10 x: from 1 to 2 / Vedo34 x: from 1 to 8 / Vedo68 x: from 1 to 8 / Vedo200 x: from 1 to 16
Vedo10 x: from 1 to 1 / Vedo34 x: from 1 to 2 / Vedo68 x: from 1 to 3 / Vedo200 x: from 1 to 8
Indices
Parameters
1.1.1.1.x.2
1.1.1.1.x.4
1.1.1.1.x.5
1.1.1.1.x.16
1.1.1.1.x.17
1.1.1.1.x.18
1.1.1.1.x.19
1.1.1.1.x.22
1.1.1.1.x.24
1.1.1.1.x.25
1.1.1.1.x.26
Checked areas
Tamper areas
Technical areas
Buzzer on
Entrance Buzzer
Exit Buzzer
Alarm Buzzer
Pre-alert Buzzer
System status display time
Tamper cycles
Technical cycles
Unlimited System status
display time
Unlimited tamper cycles
Unlimited technical cycles
Quick activation
Area status
Zones open
Send email
Send Digital Com
Buzzer ActDeact
Buzzer Act.Failed
1.1.1.1.x.27
1.1.1.1.x.28
1.1.1.1.x.29
1.1.1.1.x.33
1.1.1.1.x.35
1.1.1.1.x.37
1.1.1.1.x.40
1.1.1.1.x.41
1.1.1.1.x.43
1.1.1.1.x.44
Configurations necessary to guarantee
Grade 2 certification
At least one selected area
At least one selected area
At least one selected area
Active
Active
Active
Active
Active
0 (+30 seconds)
Unlimited
Unlimited
Deselected
Selected
Selected
Deselected
Selected
Selected
Selected
Selected
Selected
Selected
5.3.2 App
x: from 1 to 8
Indices
Parameters
1.1.1.5.x.2
1.1.1.5.x.3
1.1.1.5.x.4
1.1.1.5.x.9
1.1.1.5.x.10
1.1.1.5.x.12
1.1.1.5.x.23
Controllable areas
Tamper areas
Tamper cycles
Send email
Send digital communication
Unlimited tamper cycles
Unlimited start-up time
Configurations necessary to guarantee
Grade 2 certification
At least one selected area
At least one selected area
Unlimited
Selected
Selected
Selected
Deselected
5.3.3 Input/output expansions (8I8O)
Vedo10 x: not available / Vedo34 x: from 1 to 8 / Vedo68 x: from 1 to 12 / Vedo200 x: from 1 to 50
Indices
Parameters
1.1.1.7.x.2
1.1.1.7.x.3
1.1.1.7.x.4
1.1.1.7.x.5
1.1.1.7.x.8
1.1.1.7.x.9
1.1.1.7.x.11
1.1.1.7.x.12
Tamper areas
Technical areas
Tamper cycles
Technical cycles
Unlimited tamper cycles
Unlimited technical cycles
Send email
Send Digital Com
Configurations necessary to guarantee
Grade 2 certification
At least one selected area
At least one selected area
Unlimited
Unlimited
Selected
Selected
Selected
Selected
5.3.4 Power supply stations
Indices
Parameters
Tamper Areas
Technical Areas
Tamper cycles
Technical cycles
Unlimited tamper cycles
Unlimited technical cycles
Send email
Send digital communications
Tamper enabled
Network alarm delay
Battery alarm delay
81
Parameters
1.1.1.10.x.2
1.1.1.10.x.3
1.1.1.10.x.4
1.1.1.10.x.5
1.1.1.10.x.7
1.1.1.10.x.8
1.1.1.10.x.10
1.1.1.10.x.11
Tamper areas
Technical areas
Tamper cycles
Technical cycles
Unlimited tamper cycles
Unlimited technical cycles
Send email
Send digital communication
Configurations necessary to guarantee
Grade 2 certification
At least one selected area
At least one selected area
Unlimited
Unlimited
Selected
Selected
Selected
Selected
Selected
Max 60 seconds
Max 5 minutes
Configurations necessary to guarantee
Grade 2 certification
At least one selected area
At least one selected area
Unlimited
Unlimited
Selected
Selected
Selected
Selected
5.3.7 Radio outputs
Vedo10 x: from 1 to 16 / Vedo34 x: from 1 to 32 / Vedo68 x: from 1 to 48 / Vedo200 x: from 1 to
128
y: from 1 to 4
Configurations necessary to guarantee
Grade 2 certification
1.1.1.11.x.7
Siren on time out (not active) **
1.1.1.11.x.8
Siren sound for on (not active) **
1.1.1.11.x.13
Cycle Outputs
**
1.1.1.11.x.14
Unlimited Cycle Outputs
**
1.1.1.11.x.15
Output type
*** Monostable
1.1.1.11.x.17
OFF Time
**
1.1.1.11.x.19
ON Time
**
1.1.1.11.x.20
System status areas
At least one selected area
1.1.1.11.x.21
Tamper and technical areas
At least one selected area
1.1.1.11.x.22
Sabotage cycles
Unlimited
1.1.1.11.x.23
Technical cycles
Unlimited
1.1.1.11.x.24
Monitoring time
Maximum 20 minutes
1.1.1.11.x.25
Unlimited sabotage cycles
Selected
1.1.1.11.x.26
Unlimited technical cycles
Selected
1.1.1.11.x.31
Disable battery check
Deselected
** The total activation time of a siren must not exceed that prescribed by local regulations.
*** These apply only to sirens
Indices
Parameters
RADIO OUTPUT EVENTS
Indices
Parameters
1.1.1.11.x.27.y.1
Event
1.1.1.11.x.27.y.2
Polarity
1.1.1.11.x.27.y.3
And/or
* These apply only to sirens
Configurations necessary to guarantee
Grade 2 certification
* Alarms/Sabotage+ Motion sensor
jamming fault
* Direct
* OR
RADIO OUTPUT CONFIGURATION
Indices
Parameters
1.1.1.11.x.28.1.1
Timer in And
Timer in Or
Events logic
Send email
Send digital communicator
Output activation only with
system activated
1.1.1.11.x.28.1.2
1.1.1.11.x.28.1.7
1.1.1.11.x.28.1.9
1.1.1.11.x.28.1.10
Vedo10 x: from 1 to 1 / Vedo34 x: from 1 to 4 / Vedo68 x: from 1 to 8 / Vedo200 x: from 1 to 8
1.1.1.8.x.2
1.1.1.8.x.3
1.1.1.8.x.4
1.1.1.8.x.5
1.1.1.8.x.7
1.1.1.8.x.8
1.1.1.8.x.10
1.1.1.8.x.11
1.1.1.8.x.13
1.1.1.8.x.14
1.1.1.8.x.15
Indices
1.1.1.11.x.28.1.12
Configurations necessary to guarantee
Grade 2 certification
* No timer
* No timer
* OR
Selected
Selected
Selected if connected to a siren
* These apply only to sirens
5.3.8 Radio controls
Vedo10 x: from 1 to 11 / Vedo34 x: from 1 to 64 / Vedo68 x: from 1 to 96 / Vedo200 x: from 1 to
256
Indices
Parameters
1.1.1.12.x.3
1.1.1.12.x.5
1.1.1.12.x.7
1.1.1.12.x.13
1.1.1.12.x.14
1.1.1.12.x.19
Areas
Unlimited fault cycles
Fault cycles
Send email
Send digital communications
Forced activation
Configurations necessary to guarantee
Grade 2 certification
At least one selected area
Selected
Unlimited
Selected
Selected
Deselected
5.3.9 Radio zones
WIRED OUTPUT EVENTS
Vedo10 x: from 1 to 16 / Vedo34 x: from 1 to 64 / Vedo68 x: from 1 to 96 / Vedo200 x: from 1 to
256
Indices
1.1.1.13.x.3
1.1.1.13.x.16
1.1.1.13.x.18
1.1.1.13.x.20
Parameters
Monitoring
Unlimited fault cycles
Fault cycles
Tamper enable
Configurations necessary to guarantee
Grade 2 certification
Maximum 20 minutes
Selected
Unlimited
Selected
RADIO SUBZONE PARAMETERS
Indices
Parameters
1.1.1.17.x.11.y.1
Event
1.1.1.17.x.11.y.2
Polarity
And/or
1.1.1.17.x.11.y.3
* These apply only to outputs connected to sirens
WIRED OUTPUT CONFIGURATION
Indices
Parameters
Timer in And
Timer in Or
Events logic
Send email
Send digital communicator
Output activation only with
system activated
Indices
Parameters
Configurations necessary to guarantee
Grade 2 certification
1.1.1.17.x.12.1.1
1.1.1.13.x.21.1.3
Areas
At least one selected area
1.1.1.13.x.21.1.4
Alarm cycles
Can be self-disabled (alarm
only)
Can be self-disabled with
reset (alarm only)
Unlimited alarm cycles
Send email
Send digital com
1.1.1.17.x.12.1.7
1.1.1.13.x.21.1.22
1.1.1.13.x.21.1.23
1.1.1.13.x.21.1.30
1.1.1.13.x.21.1.44
1.1.1.13.x.21.1.45
Unlimited
Deselected
Deselected
Selected
Selected
Selected
5.3.10 Wired zones
Vedo10 x: from 1 to 16 / Vedo34 x: from 1 to 95 / Vedo68 x: from 1 to 133 / Vedo200 x: from 1 to
453
Vedo10 y: from 1 to 1 / Vedo34 y: from 1 to 2 / Vedo68 y: from 1 to 2 / Vedo200 y: from 1 to 2
Configurations necessary to guarantee
Grade 2 certification
All alarm, fault and command zones
must be set to double or triple balance or
1.1.1.14.x.13
Balancing
double with EOL. The sabotage zones
must be set to single or double or triple or
triple with jamming or double with EOL.
1.1.1.14.x.14
Unlimited fault cycles
Selected
1.1.1.14.x.15
Fault cycles
Unlimited
* If triple balance is not used for all the sensors, three inputs of the control panel must be
programmed to signal the following events:
- Detector fault
- Anti-robbery device fault, if robbery zone present
- Siren fault
In order to guarantee compliance with Standards EN50131-1 and EN50131-3:
In order to guarantee compliance with Standards EN50131-1 and EN50131-3, a siren sabotage
zone must be provided.
Indices
Parameters
Parameters
1.1.1.14.x.15.y.3
Areas
Alarm cycles
Can be self-disabled (alarm
only)
Can be self-disabled with
reset (alarm only)
Unlimited alarm cycles
Send email
Send digital com
1.1.1.14.x.15.y.4
1.1.1.14.x.15.y.22
1.1.1.14.x.15.y.23
1.1.1.14.x.15.y.30
1.1.1.14.x.15.y.44
1.1.1.14.x.15.y.45
Configurations necessary to guarantee
Grade 2 certification
At least one selected area
Unlimited
Deselected
Deselected
Selected
Selected
Selected
5.3.11 Areas
Vedo10 x: from 1 to 2 / Vedo34 x: from 1 to 8 / Vedo68 x: from 1 to 8 / Vedo200 x: from 1 to 16
Indices
Parameters
1.1.1.16.x.4
1.1.1.16.x.5
1.1.1.16.x.8
1.1.1.16.x.10
1.1.1.16.x.15
Entry 1 time
Entry 2 time
Pre-alert time
Pre-alarm time
Report pre-alert
Configurations necessary to guarantee
Grade 2 certification
Max 45 seconds
Max 45 seconds
Other than 0
0
Selected
5.3.12 Wired outputs
Vedo10 x: from 1 to 7 / Vedo34 x: from 1 to 75 / Vedo68 x: from 1 to 115 / Vedo200 x: from 1 to
419
y: from 1 to 4
Indices
Parameters
Configurations necessary to guarantee
Grade 2 certification
* Monostable
Deselected
**
**
**
**
1.1.1.17.x.3
Output type
1.1.1.17.x.5
Unlimited cycles
1.1.1.17.x.6
ON time scale
1.1.1.17.x.7
ON Time
1.1.1.17.x.8
OFF TIME:
1.1.1.17.x.10
Cycles
* These apply only to outputs connected to sirens
** The total activation time of a siren must not exceed that prescribed by local regulations.
82
1.1.1.17.x.12.1.2
1.1.1.17.x.12.1.9
1.1.1.17.x.12.1.10
1.1.1.17.x.12.1.12
Configurations necessary to guarantee
Grade 2 certification
* No timer
* No timer
* OR
Selected
Selected
Selected if connected to a siren
* These apply only to outputs connected to sirens.
For standard EN50131 an output of the control panel must be activated in the case of a fault and must not
be connected to a siren.
5.3.13 User
Vedo10 x: from 1 to 8 / Vedo34 x: from 1 to 32 / Vedo68 x: from 1 to 50 / Vedo200 x: from 1 to 200
Indices
Parameters
1.1.1.20.x.17
1.1.1.20.x.18
Send email
Send digital communicator
Configurations necessary to guarantee
Grade 2 certification
Selected
Selected
The codes accepted must have 6 figures and range from 000000 to 999998. Code 999999 is not
an accepted code. The robbery code is the user code + 1.
Example: user code 111111, the corresponding robbery code is 111112. Code 119999, robbery
code = 120000. Code 123459, robbery code = 123460 - It is not possible to register a user code
corresponding to an existing user code + 1, since this new code corresponds to the robbery code
of the existing user.
In the system it is therefore possible to store up to a theoretical maximum of 999943 user codes.
The calculation is the result of the fact that it is not possible to create a user code that is the same
as an existing user code + 1 (which is the robbery code). The actual maximum number of user
codes that can be configured is shown in the paragraph “3.10 CODES” on page 43 on page
43.
The authorised user can perform an infinite number of changes of his user code and can create
and eliminate another user, whereas he is unable to modify any user code other than his own.
CODE TYPE
x: from 1 to 9
SUBZONE PARAMETERS
Indices
Configurations necessary to guarantee
Grade 2 certification
* Alarms/Sabotage+ Motion sensor
jamming fault
* Direct
* OR
Indices
Parameters
1.1.1.22.x.19
Request assistance
1.1.1.22.x.20
1.1.1.22.x.21
1.1.1.22.x.23
Change Pin
Reset control panel
Fault management
1.1.1.22.x.26
Programme from PC
1.1.1.22.x.42
1.1.1.22.x.44
Codes menu
FW Update
1.1.1.22.x.45
Reset alarms L3
Configurations necessary to guarantee
Grade 2 certification
Active for at least one type of user (x
enab. inst.) and one type of installer (x
enab. manuf.)
Active only for installers
Active at least for manufacturer
Active for all
Active at least for installer and
manufacturer
Active for all
Only for manufacturer
Selected
Deselected for Patrol
5.3.14 Installers
Vedo10 x: from 1 to 3 / Vedo34 x: from 1 to 6 / Vedo68 x: from 1 to 6 / Vedo200 x: from 1 to 6
Indices
Parameters
1.1.1.21.x.5
1.1.1.21.x.6
Send email
Send digital communicator
Configurations necessary to guarantee
Grade 2 certification
Selected
Selected
CODE TYPE
x: from 1 to 9
Indices
Parameters
1.1.1.22.x.19
Request assistance
1.1.1.22.x.20
1.1.1.22.x.21
1.1.1.22.x.23
Change Pin
Reset control panel
Fault management
1.1.1.22.x.26
Programme from PC
1.1.1.22.x.42
1.1.1.22.x.44
Codes menu
FW Update
1.1.1.22.x.45
Reset alarms L3
Configurations necessary to guarantee
Grade 2 certification
Active for at least one type of user (x
enab. inst.) and one type of installer (x
enab. manuf.)
Active only for installers
Active at least for manufacturer
Active for all
Active at least for installer and
manufacturer
Active for all
Only for manufacturer
Selected
Deselected for Patrol
5.3.15 IP Options
Indices
Parameters
1.1.1.24.1.1
1.1.1.24.1.2
1.1.1.24.1.3
1.1.1.24.1.4
1.1.1.24.1.5
1.1.1.24.1.18
1.1.1.24.1.19
1.1.1.24.1.20
1.1.1.24.1.21
1.1.1.24.1.22
1.1.1.24.1.23
1.1.1.24.1.24
1.1.1.24.1.28
1.1.1.24.1.29
IP
Netmask
Gateway
Dns1
Dns2
SMTP server
SMTP port
SMTP Email
SMTP Username
SMTP Password
SMTP Email subj.
SMTP with ssl
SMTP enable
Internet check enable
* If the digital communicator or voice messages are not enabled
5.3.16 GSM settings
Indices
Parameters
1.1.1.25.1.24
Jamming control
Parameters
1.1.1.27.1.5
Tones recognition timeout
Telephone line parameters
(pstn)
Length of call
Voice message repetition
Attempts
Send message
Termination with confirmation
Tones control (pstn)
Telephone line control (pstn)
Alert Priority Setup
PSTN switchboard prefix
Parameters
5.3.21 Detailed events
x: from 1 to 8 y: from 1 to 8
Configurations necessary to guarantee
Grade 2 certification
Selected
5.3.17 Telephone Options
Indices
Configurations necessary to guarantee
Grade 2 certification
* If the digital communicator is not active, the following events must be signalled:
- Robbery Alarm
- Burglar Alarm
- H24 Alarm
- Sabotage
- Expansion bus
- No network
- Radio sensor battery low
- Radio siren battery low
- Auto-activation failed
- Failed activation fault
- Zone fault
- Robbery zone fault
- Motion sensor jamming fault
- Regular PSTN and email communication
- Regular GSM communication
Of course it must also be completed by sending the respective voice message.
Indices
Configurations necessary to guarantee
Grade 2 certification
* Completed
* Completed
* Completed
* Completed
* Completed
* Completed
* Completed
* Completed
* Completed
* Completed
* Completed
* Completed
* Selected
* Selected
Indices
Parameters
1.1.1.31.x.3
1.1.1.31.x.4
communicator telephones
Areas
DETAILED EVENTS FLAGS
Configurations necessary to guarantee
Grade 2 certification
= 60 seconds
Indices
Parameters
1.1.1.31.x.6.y.2
Zone Exclusion
1.1.1.31.x.6.y.3
Zone Isolation
1.1.1.31.x.6.y.4
1.1.1.31.x.6.y.5
1.1.1.31.x.6.y.6
1.1.1.31.x.6.y.7
1.1.1.31.x.6.y.8
Total ON
Partial 1 ON
Partial 2 ON
Effective activation
Deactivated
1.1.1.31.x.6.y.10
Burglar Alarm
1.1.1.31.x.6.y.11
24H Alarm
1.1.1.31.x.6.y.12
Fire Alarm
1.1.1.31.x.6.y.13
Panic Alarm
1.1.1.31.x.6.y.14
Robbery Alarm
1.1.1.31.x.6.y.15
Flood alarm
1.1.1.31.x.6.y.16
Gas Alarm
1.1.1.31.x.6.y.17
Medical Alarm
5.3.19 Digital communicator contacts list
1.1.1.31.x.6.y.18
Zones Sabotage Tamper
x: from 1 to 4
1.1.1.31.x.6.y.19
Siren tamper
1.1.1.31.x.6.y.20
Radio device jamming
1.1.1.31.x.6.y.21
Tamper App
1.1.1.31.x.6.y.22
Tamper free 1
1.1.1.31.x.6.y.23
Tamper free 2
1.1.1.31.x.6.y.24
Tamper free 3
1.1.1.31.x.6.y.25
Tamper free 4
1.1.1.31.x.6.y.26
Bus I/O expansions tamper
1.1.1.31.x.6.y.27
BUS keypad tamper
1.1.1.31.x.6.y.28
RFID tamper
1.1.1.31.x.6.y.29
Safetouch tamper
1.1.1.31.x.6.y.30
Touch Tamper
1.1.1.27.1.9
1.1.1.27.1.10
1.1.1.27.1.12
1.1.1.27.1.14
1.1.1.27.1.15
1.1.1.27.1.16
1.1.1.27.1.19
1.1.1.27.1.20
1.1.1.27.1.21
1.1.1.27.1.22
Selected
= 60 seconds
5
3
Press key 1
Selected
Selected
Selected
SMS and MMS follow
* Empty
* The PSTN line must be connected before the switchboard.
5.3.18 Phone Book / Email
x: from 1 to 16
Configurations necessary to guarantee
Grade 2 certification
1.1.1.28.x.1
Description
*
1.1.1.28.x.2
Telephone
*
1.1.1.28.x.4
Line active
* At least one selected
1.1.1.28.x.7
Email receipt
* At least one selected
* If the digital communicator is not active, at least one user must be present
Indices
Parameters
Indices
Parameters
1.1.1.29.x.2
1.1.1.29.x.4
1.1.1.29.x.5
1.1.1.29.x.6
Periodic test
Protocol
Test period
Attempts
1.1.1.29.x.7
Number to call
1.1.1.29.x.8
Customer code
1.1.1.29.x.10
Periodic test start date
Configurations necessary to guarantee
Grade 2 certification
Active
Contact ID
<=25h
1
If the digital communicator is not active,
at least the telephone sounder or email
transmission must be configured correctly
Valorised
Value before date of activating the system
(must be before current date)
5.3.20 Generic events
Vedo10 x: from 1 to 20 / Vedo34 x: from 1 to 32 / Vedo68 x: from 1 to 48 / Vedo200 x: from 1 to 48
Indices
Parameters
1.1.1.30.x.2
1.1.1.30.x.5
1.1.1.30.x.6
1.1.1.30.x.9
1.1.1.30.x.19
Event
Activation voice message
Reset voice message
Send activation email
Send address
Configurations necessary to guarantee
Grade 2 certification
*
Active for at least one phone
Active for at least one phone
Active for at least one email
* Selected
1.1.1.31.x.6.y.31
1.1.1.31.x.6.y.32
83
Configurations necessary to guarantee
Grade 2 certification
At least one selected
At least one selected
BUS power supply station or
isolator tamper
BUS radio concentrator
tamper
1.1.1.31.x.6.y.33
Bus siren tamper
1.1.1.31.x.6.y.34
Alarm communication device
tamper
1.1.1.31.x.6.y.35
IP expansion tamper
1.1.1.31.x.6.y.36
IP video expansion tamper
Configurations necessary to guarantee
Grade 2 certification
* - activation: Selected
* - reset: Selected
* - activation: Selected
* - reset: Selected
* - activation: Selected
* - activation: Selected
* - activation: Selected
* - activation: Selected
* - activation: Selected
* - activation: Selected
* - reset: Selected
* - activation: Selected
* - reset: Selected
* - activation: Selected
* - reset: Selected
* - activation: Selected
* - reset: Selected
* - activation: Selected
* - reset: Selected
* - activation: Selected
* - reset: Selected
* - activation: Selected
* - reset: Selected
* - activation: Selected
* - reset: Selected
* - activation: Selected
* - reset: Selected
* - activation: Selected
* - reset: Selected
* - activation: Selected
* - reset: Selected
* - activation: Selected
* - reset: Selected
* - activation: Selected
* - reset: Selected
* - activation: Selected
* - reset: Selected
* - activation: Selected
* - reset: Selected
* - activation: Selected
* - reset: Selected
* - activation: Selected
* - reset: Selected
* - activation: Selected
* - reset: Selected
* - activation: Selected
* - reset: Selected
* - activation: Selected
* - reset: Selected
* - activation: Selected
* - reset: Selected
* - activation: Selected
* - reset: Selected
* - activation: Selected
* - reset: Selected
* - activation: Selected
* - reset: Selected
* - activation: Selected
* - reset: Selected
* - activation: Selected
* - reset: Selected
* - activation: Selected
* - reset: Selected
Indices
1.1.1.31.x.6.y.37
1.1.1.31.x.6.y.38
1.1.1.31.x.6.y.39
1.1.1.31.x.6.y.40
1.1.1.31.x.6.y.41
1.1.1.31.x.6.y.42
1.1.1.31.x.6.y.43
1.1.1.31.x.6.y.44
1.1.1.31.x.6.y.45
1.1.1.31.x.6.y.46
1.1.1.31.x.6.y.47
1.1.1.31.x.6.y.48
1.1.1.31.x.6.y.49
1.1.1.31.x.6.y.50
1.1.1.31.x.6.y.51
1.1.1.31.x.6.y.52
1.1.1.31.x.6.y.53
1.1.1.31.x.6.y.54
1.1.1.31.x.6.y.55
1.1.1.31.x.6.y.56
1.1.1.31.x.6.y.57
1.1.1.31.x.6.y.58
1.1.1.31.x.6.y.59
1.1.1.31.x.6.y.60
1.1.1.31.x.6.y.61
1.1.1.31.x.6.y.62
1.1.1.31.x.6.y.63
1.1.1.31.x.6.y.64
1.1.1.31.x.6.y.65
1.1.1.31.x.6.y.66
1.1.1.31.x.6.y.67
1.1.1.31.x.6.y.68
1.1.1.31.x.6.y.69
1.1.1.31.x.6.y.70
1.1.1.31.x.6.y.71
1.1.1.31.x.6.y.72
1.1.1.31.x.6.y.73
1.1.1.31.x.6.y.74
1.1.1.31.x.6.y.75
1.1.1.31.x.6.y.76
1.1.1.31.x.6.y.77
1.1.1.31.x.6.y.78
1.1.1.31.x.6.y.79
1.1.1.31.x.6.y.80
1.1.1.31.x.6.y.81
1.1.1.31.x.6.y.82
1.1.1.31.x.6.y.83
1.1.1.31.x.6.y.84
84
Configurations necessary to guarantee
Grade 2 certification
* - activation: Selected
Tamper bus free 0
* - reset: Selected
* - activation: Selected
Tamper bus free 1
* - reset: Selected
* - activation: Selected
Tamper bus free 2
* - reset: Selected
* - activation: Selected
Tamper bus free 3
* - reset: Selected
* - activation: Selected
Tamper bus free 4
* - reset: Selected
Remote communications
* - activation: Selected
tamper
* - reset: Selected
* - activation: Selected
GSM concentrator jamming
* - reset: Selected
* - activation: Selected
False code
* - reset: Selected
* - activation: Selected
Zone Fault
* - reset: Selected
* - activation: Selected
Siren fuse fault
* - reset: Selected
* - activation: Selected
Radio control fault
* - reset: Selected
* - activation: Selected
Power supply unit fuse fault
* - reset: Selected
Power supply unit battery
* - activation: Selected
fault
* - reset: Selected
* - activation: Selected
Radio output battery fault
* - reset: Selected
* - activation: Selected
Bus siren battery fault
* - reset: Selected
* - activation: Selected
No power supply unit network
* - reset: Selected
* - activation: Selected
Radio zone battery fault
* - reset: Selected
* - activation: Selected
Radio control battery fault
* - reset: Selected
* - activation: Selected
Input voltage level fault
* - reset: Selected
* - activation: Selected
Output voltage level fault
* - reset: Selected
* - activation: Selected
Zones RX monitoring
* - reset: Selected
* - activation: Selected
Outputs RX monitoring
* - reset: Selected
* - activation: Selected
Output fault
* - reset: Selected
* - activation: Selected
Camera fault
* - reset: Selected
* - activation: Selected
No GSM/GPRS coverage
* - reset: Selected
* - activation: Selected
Telephone line fault
* - reset: Selected
Failed communication fault
* - activation: Selected
* - activation: Selected
Robbery zone fault
* - reset: Selected
Failed activation fault
* - activation: Selected
* - activation: Selected
IP Expansion fault on bus
* - reset: Selected
* - activation: Selected
Motion sensor jamming fault
* - reset: Selected
* - activation: Selected
Fault free 5
* - reset: Selected
* - activation: Selected
Fault free 6
* - reset: Selected
* - activation: Selected
I/O expansion Bus Fault
* - reset: Selected
* - activation: Selected
Keypad Bus Fault
* - reset: Selected
* - activation: Selected
Reader Bus Fault
* - reset: Selected
* - activation: Selected
Safe Touch Bus Fault
* - reset: Selected
* - activation: Selected
Touch Bus Fault
* - reset: Selected
Isolator Power Supply Unit
* - activation: Selected
Bus Fault
* - reset: Selected
* - activation: Selected
Radio Concentrator Bus Fault
* - reset: Selected
* - activation: Selected
Siren Bus Fault
* - reset: Selected
Alarm Communication Device * - activation: Selected
Bus Fault
* - reset: Selected
* - activation: Selected
IP Expansion Bus Fault
* - reset: Selected
* - activation: Selected
IP Video Expansion Bus Fault
* - reset: Selected
* - activation: Selected
Fault free bus 0
* - reset: Selected
* - activation: Selected
Fault free bus 1
* - reset: Selected
* - activation: Selected
Fault free bus 2
* - reset: Selected
* - activation: Selected
Fault free bus 3
* - reset: Selected
Parameters
Configurations necessary to guarantee
Grade 2 certification
* - activation: Selected
1.1.1.31.x.6.y.85
Fault free bus 4
* - reset: Selected
* - activation: Selected
1.1.1.31.x.6.y.86
Control Panel Battery Fault
* - reset: Selected
Control Panel Power Supply
* - activation: Selected
1.1.1.31.x.6.y.87
Mains Outage
* - reset: Selected
* - activation: Selected
1.1.1.31.x.6.y.88
Control panel pstn fault
* - reset: Selected
* - activation: Selected
1.1.1.31.x.6.y.89
Control panel GSM fault
* - reset: Selected
* - activation: Selected
1.1.1.31.x.6.y.90
Control panel IP fault
* - reset: Selected
Control panel voice synthesis * - activation: Selected
1.1.1.31.x.6.y.91
fault
* - reset: Selected
* - activation: Selected
1.1.1.31.x.6.y.92
Control panel Intercom fault
* - reset: Selected
Control panel home
* - activation: Selected
1.1.1.31.x.6.y.93
automation expansion fault
* - reset: Selected
Auxiliary power supply fuse
* - activation: Selected
1.1.1.31.x.6.y.94
fault
* - reset: Selected
* - activation: Selected
1.1.1.31.x.6.y.95
Bus power supply fuse fault
* - reset: Selected
* - activation: Selected
1.1.1.31.x.6.y.96
Siren power supply fuse fault
* - reset: Selected
Control panel power supply
* - activation: Selected
1.1.1.31.x.6.y.97
unit fault
* - reset: Selected
* - activation: Selected
1.1.1.31.x.6.y.98
Control panel bus fault
* - reset: Selected
* - activation: Selected
1.1.1.31.x.6.y.99
Telephone line fault
* - reset: Selected
* - activation: Selected
1.1.1.31.x.6.y.100 No GSM network
* - reset: Selected
* - activation: Selected
1.1.1.31.x.6.y.101 No GPRS network
* - reset: Selected
* - activation: Selected
1.1.1.31.x.6.y.102 Date lost
* - reset: Selected
1.1.1.31.x.6.y.108 L2 forced ON
* - activation: Selected
1.1.1.31.x.6.y.109 L3 forced ON
* - activation: Selected
1.1.1.31.x.6.y.116 Timed activation error
* - activation: Selected
* - activation: Selected
1.1.1.31.x.6.y.119 Technical programming
* - reset: Selected
* - activation: Selected
1.1.1.31.x.6.y.120 Control panel in service
* - reset: Selected
1.1.1.31.x.6.y.126 Change date and time
* - activation: Selected
* - activation: Selected
1.1.1.31.x.6.y.127 Change site data
* - reset: Selected
* - activation: Selected
1.1.1.31.x.6.y.140 Lock RFID
* - reset: Selected
* - activation: Selected
1.1.1.31.x.6.y.143 Lock Web
* - reset: Selected
* - activation: Selected
1.1.1.31.x.6.y.144 Lock PC
* - reset: Selected
* - activation: Selected
1.1.1.31.x.6.y.145 Lock SMS
* - reset: Selected
* - activation: Selected
1.1.1.31.x.6.y.146 Lock voice
* - reset: Selected
* - activation: Selected
1.1.1.31.x.6.y.147 Home autom. lock
* - reset: Selected
1.1.1.31.x.6.y.151 Activation action
* - activation: Selected
1.1.1.31.x.6.y.152 Burglar Alarm Action
* - activation: Selected
1.1.1.31.x.6.y.153 24H Alarm Action
* - activation: Selected
1.1.1.31.x.6.y.154 Fire Alarm Action
* - activation: Selected
1.1.1.31.x.6.y.155 Panic Alarm Action
* - activation: Selected
1.1.1.31.x.6.y.156 Robbery Alarm Action
* - activation: Selected
1.1.1.31.x.6.y.157 Flood Alarm Action
* - activation: Selected
1.1.1.31.x.6.y.158 Gas Alarm Action
* - activation: Selected
1.1.1.31.x.6.y.159 Medical Alarm Action
* - activation: Selected
1.1.1.31.x.6.y.177 Zone exclusion command
* - activation: Selected
1.1.1.31.x.6.y.178 Zone inclusion command
* - activation: Selected
1.1.1.31.x.6.y.179 Zone isolation command
* - activation: Selected
1.1.1.31.x.6.y.180 Zone activation command
* - activation: Selected
* - activation: Selected
1.1.1.31.x.6.y.183 Safe Touch lock
* - reset: Selected
* - activation: Selected
1.1.1.31.x.6.y.188 Touch lock
* - reset: Selected
* - activation: Selected
1.1.1.31.x.6.y.200 App locked
* - reset: Selected
* - activation: Selected
1.1.1.31.x.6.y.205 Touch lock
* - reset: Selected
Digital communicator manual * - activation: Selected
1.1.1.31.x.6.y.208
test
* - reset: Selected
* - activation: Selected
1.1.1.31.x.6.y.216 Zone Restriction
* - reset: Selected
Communicator parameters
1.1.1.31.x.6.y.219
* - activation: Selected
changed
* - activation: Selected
1.1.1.31.x.6.y.220 Updating firmware
* - reset: Selected
* Only for the digital communicator and email columns
Indices
Parameters
5.3.22 Service voice messages
x: from 1 to 6
Indices
Parameters
1.1.1.36.x.1
Text
Configurations necessary to guarantee
Grade 2 certification
The system address field must be
completed
5.3.23 Timer Types
TIMER TYPE SCHEDULES
Configurations necessary to guarantee
Grade 2 certification
1.1.1.37.x.2.y.1
Time ON1
Timer 4 completed*
1.1.1.37.x.2.y.2
Time OFF1
Timer 4 completed*
* Timer 4 completed and linked with the two regular general events
Parameters
5.3.24 Timer Model
Vedo10/Vedo34/Vedo68 x: from 1 to 30 / Vedo200 x: from 1 to 60
Indices
Parameters
1.1.1.39.x.1
1.1.1.39.x.2
1.1.1.39.x.3
1.1.1.39.x.4
1.1.1.39.x.5
1.1.1.39.x.6
1.1.1.39.x.7
1.1.1.39.x.8
1.1.1.39.x.9
1.1.1.39.x.10
Start day of week
End day of week
Start month
End month
Start date
Selection
End date
Start year
End year
Timer Type
Configurations necessary to guarantee
Grade 2 certification
Line 1 '*'
Line 1 '*'
Line 1 '*'
Line 1 '*'
Line 1 '*'
First line selected
Line 1 '*'
Line 1 '*'
Line 1 '*'
Line 1 'Timer 4'
5.3.25 System Parameters
Indices
Parameters
1.1.1.42.1.2
1.1.1.42.1.3
1.1.1.42.1.4
1.1.1.42.1.5
1.1.1.42.1.14
1.1.1.42.1.15
1.1.1.42.1.16
1.1.1.42.1.17
1.1.1.42.1.18
1.1.1.42.1.19
Customer Name
System Address
Network alarm delay
Battery alarm delay
Code errors
Reactivation time
Alarm Cycles
Fault Cycles
Unlimited Alarm Cycles
Unlimited fault cycles
Device locked for incorrect
code
Activation with monitoring
fault
Forcing level 3 faults
Forcing level 3 sabotage
Installer always active
IP card enable
1.1.1.42.1.20
1.1.1.42.1.23
1.1.1.42.1.24
1.1.1.42.1.25
1.1.1.42.1.30
1.1.1.42.1.32
1.1.1.42.1.33
Audio control enable
1.1.1.42.1.34
1.1.1.42.1.37
1.1.1.42.1.38
GSM card enable
PSTN enable (on board)
Failed activation fault enable
Enable test for fault and
zones sabotage
Default codes change
mandatory
1.1.1.42.1.39
1.1.1.42.1.42
Configurations necessary to guarantee
Grade 2 certification
Fill in the field
Fill in the field
Max 60 seconds
Max 5 minutes
<=10
Minimum 2 minutes
Unlimited
Unlimited
Selected
Selected
1.1.1.43.x.2
1.1.1.43.x.3
1.1.1.43.x.4
1.1.1.43.x.5
1.1.1.43.x.6
1.1.1.43.x.7
1.1.1.43.x.8
1.1.1.43.x.10
1.1.1.43.x.11
1.1.1.43.x.12
1.1.1.43.x.13
1.1.1.43.x.14
1.1.1.43.x.15
1.1.1.43.x.16
1.1.1.43.x.17
1.1.1.43.x.18
1.1.1.43.x.19
1.1.1.43.x.20
1.1.1.43.x.21
1.1.1.43.x.26
Zone Exclusion
Zone Isolation
Total ON
Partial 1 ON
Partial 2 ON
Effective activation
Deactivated
Burglar Alarm
24H Alarm
Fire Alarm
Panic Alarm
Robbery Alarm
Flood alarm
Gas Alarm
Medical Alarm
Zones Sabotage Tamper
Siren tamper
Radio device jamming
Tamper App
Bus I/O expansions tamper
85
Bus keypad tamper
RFID tamper
Safetouch tamper
Touch Tamper
Bus power supply station or
isolator tamper
Bus radio concentrator
tamper
Bus siren tamper
Alarm communication device
tamper
IP expansion tamper
IP video expansion tamper
Remote communications
tamper
GSM concentrator jamming
False code
Zone Fault
Siren fuse fault
Radio control fault
Power supply unit fuse fault
Power supply unit battery
fault
Radio output battery fault
Bus siren battery fault
No power supply unit network
Radio zone battery fault
Radio control battery fault
Input voltage level fault
Output voltage level fault
Zones RX monitoring
Outputs RX monitoring
Output fault
Camera fault
No GSM/GPRS coverage
Telephone line fault
Failed communication fault
Robbery zone fault
Failed activation fault
IP Expansion fault on bus
Motion sensor jamming fault
I/O expansion Bus Fault
Keypad Bus Fault
Reader Bus Fault
Safe Touch Bus Fault
Touch Bus Fault
Isolator Power Supply Unit
Bus Fault
Radio Concentrator Bus Fault
Siren Bus Fault
Alarm Communication Device
Bus Fault
IP Expansion Bus Fault
IP Video Expansion Bus Fault
Control Panel Battery Fault
Control Panel Power Supply
Mains Outage
Control panel pstn fault
Control panel GSM fault
Control panel IP fault
Control panel voice synthesis
fault
Auxiliary power supply fuse
fault
Bus power supply fuse fault
Siren power supply fuse fault
Control panel power supply
unit fault
Control panel bus fault
Telephone line fault
No GSM network
No GPRS network
Date lost
Inactivity
Zone test
User logged in
L2 forced ON
L3 forced ON
Negligence
Alarm log
Reset alarms
Stop alarms
Stop telephone calls
Timed activation error
Technical programming
Control panel in service
Reset system alarms
Stop system alarms
Stop system telephone calls
1.1.1.43.x.31
1.1.1.43.x.33
1.1.1.43.x.34
1.1.1.43.x.35
1.1.1.43.x.36
1.1.1.43.x.42
1.1.1.43.x.43
1.1.1.43.x.44
1.1.1.43.x.45
1.1.1.43.x.46
1.1.1.43.x.47
1.1.1.43.x.48
1.1.1.43.x.49
1.1.1.43.x.50
1.1.1.43.x.51
1.1.1.43.x.52
1.1.1.43.x.53
1.1.1.43.x.54
1.1.1.43.x.55
1.1.1.43.x.56
1.1.1.43.x.57
1.1.1.43.x.58
1.1.1.43.x.59
1.1.1.43.x.60
1.1.1.43.x.61
1.1.1.43.x.62
1.1.1.43.x.63
1.1.1.43.x.64
1.1.1.43.x.65
1.1.1.43.x.66
1.1.1.43.x.67
1.1.1.43.x.70
1.1.1.43.x.71
1.1.1.43.x.72
1.1.1.43.x.73
1.1.1.43.x.74
1.1.1.43.x.75
Selected
1.1.1.43.x.76
1.1.1.43.x.77
Selected
Selected
Deselected
At least one active of PSTN, GSM and IP
Active if digital communicator or IP card is
not enabled
At least one active of PSTN, GSM and IP
At least one active of PSTN, GSM and IP
Selected
Deselected
Selected
1.1.1.43.x.78
1.1.1.43.x.79
1.1.1.43.x.80
1.1.1.43.x.86
1.1.1.43.x.87
1.1.1.43.x.88
1.1.1.43.x.89
1.1.1.43.x.90
1.1.1.43.x.91
1.1.1.43.x.94
1.1.1.43.x.95
1.1.1.43.x.96
x: from 1 to 2
Parameters
1.1.1.43.x.27
1.1.1.43.x.28
1.1.1.43.x.29
1.1.1.43.x.30
Selected
5.3.26 Events to be saved
Indices
Parameters
1.1.1.43.x.32
Vedo10 x: from 1 to 4 / Vedo34 x: from 1 to 8 / Vedo68 x: from 1 to 8 / Vedo200 x: from 1 to 32
Vedo10 y: from 1 to 4 / Vedo34 y: from 1 to 16 / Vedo68 y: from 1 to 16 / Vedo200 y: from 1 to 32
Indices
Indices
Configurations necessary to guarantee
Grade 2 certification
Selected
Selected
Only set selected
Only set selected
Only set selected
Only set selected
Only set selected
Selected
Selected
Selected
Selected
Selected
Selected
Selected
Selected
Selected
Selected
Selected
Selected
Selected
1.1.1.43.x.97
1.1.1.43.x.98
1.1.1.43.x.99
1.1.1.43.x.100
1.1.1.43.x.101
1.1.1.43.x.102
1.1.1.43.x.103
1.1.1.43.x.106
1.1.1.43.x.107
1.1.1.43.x.108
1.1.1.43.x.109
1.1.1.43.x.110
1.1.1.43.x.111
1.1.1.43.x.113
1.1.1.43.x.114
1.1.1.43.x.115
1.1.1.43.x.116
1.1.1.43.x.119
1.1.1.43.x.120
1.1.1.43.x.123
1.1.1.43.x.124
1.1.1.43.x.125
Configurations necessary to guarantee
Grade 2 certification
Selected
Selected
Selected
Selected
Selected
Selected
Selected
Selected
Selected
Selected
Selected
Selected
Selected
Selected
Selected
Selected
Selected
Selected
Selected
Selected
Selected
Selected
Selected
Selected
Selected
Selected
Selected
Selected
Selected
Selected
Selected
Only set selected
Selected
Only set selected
Selected
Selected
Selected
Selected
Selected
Selected
Selected
Selected
Selected
Selected
Selected
Selected
Selected
Selected
Selected
Selected
Selected
Selected
Selected
Selected
Selected
Selected
Selected
Selected
Selected
Selected
Selected
Selected
Selected
Selected
Selected
Selected
Selected
Selected
Selected
Selected
Selected
Selected
Selected
Selected
Selected
Selected
Selected
Selected
Indices
Parameters
1.1.1.43.x.126
1.1.1.43.x.127
1.1.1.43.x.130
Change date and time
Change site data
Telephone call failed
Outgoing phone
communication
Digital communicator
periodic test
Lock keypad
Lock RFID
Lock Web
Lock PC
Lock SMS
Lock voice
Activation action
Burglar Alarm Action
24H Alarm Action
Fire Alarm Action
Panic Alarm Action
Robbery Alarm Action
Flood Alarm Action
Gas Alarm Action
Medical Alarm Action
Event 1 key command
Event 2 key command
Extraordinary command
Stop alarms command
Reset alarms command
Reset telephone calls
command
Reset Control panel
command
Request support command
Authorise installer command
Confirm code command
Confirm key command
Login upgrade command
Authorise manufacturer
command
Zone exclusion command
Zone inclusion command
Zone isolation command
Zone activation command
Safe Touch lock
Touch lock
Added code command
Removed code command
Changed code command
Added key command
Removed key command
Changed key command
Database reset command
App locked
Touch lock
Digital communicator manual
test
Sending SMS
Sending email
Sending MMS
Activation lock cause
Sending telephone call
Zone Restricted
NAK digital communication
1.1.1.43.x.131
1.1.1.43.x.132
1.1.1.43.x.135
1.1.1.43.x.140
1.1.1.43.x.143
1.1.1.43.x.144
1.1.1.43.x.145
1.1.1.43.x.146
1.1.1.43.x.151
1.1.1.43.x.152
1.1.1.43.x.153
1.1.1.43.x.154
1.1.1.43.x.155
1.1.1.43.x.156
1.1.1.43.x.157
1.1.1.43.x.158
1.1.1.43.x.159
1.1.1.43.x.160
1.1.1.43.x.161
1.1.1.43.x.162
1.1.1.43.x.163
1.1.1.43.x.164
1.1.1.43.x.165
1.1.1.43.x.166
1.1.1.43.x.167
1.1.1.43.x.168
1.1.1.43.x.169
1.1.1.43.x.170
1.1.1.43.x.171
1.1.1.43.x.172
1.1.1.43.x.177
1.1.1.43.x.178
1.1.1.43.x.179
1.1.1.43.x.180
1.1.1.43.x.183
1.1.1.43.x.188
1.1.1.43.x.191
1.1.1.43.x.192
1.1.1.43.x.193
1.1.1.43.x.194
1.1.1.43.x.195
1.1.1.43.x.196
1.1.1.43.x.197
1.1.1.43.x.200
1.1.1.43.x.205
1.1.1.43.x.208
1.1.1.43.x.209
1.1.1.43.x.210
1.1.1.43.x.211
1.1.1.43.x.213
1.1.1.43.x.214
1.1.1.43.x.216
1.1.1.43.x.217
1.1.1.43.x.218
1.1.1.43.x.219
1.1.1.43.x.220
1.1.1.43.x.221
86
Configurations necessary to guarantee
Grade 2 certification
Selected
Selected
Only set selected
Selected
Selected
Selected
Selected
Selected
Selected
Selected
Selected
Only set selected
Only set selected
Only set selected
Only set selected
Only set selected
Only set selected
Only set selected
Only set selected
Only set selected
Only set selected
Only set selected
Only set selected
Only set selected
Only set selected
Only set selected
Only set selected
Only set selected
Only set selected
Only set selected
Only set selected
Only set selected
Only set selected
Only set selected
Only set selected
Only set selected
Only set selected
Selected
Selected
Only set selected
Only set selected
Only set selected
Only set selected
Only set selected
Only set selected
Only set selected
Selected
Selected
Selected
Only set selected
Only set selected
Only set selected
Only set selected
Only set selected
Selected
Only set selected
Digital communication OK
Only set selected
Communicator parameters
changed
Updating firmware
NAK email communication
Selected
Only set selected
Only set selected
5.4 CONFIGURATIONS NECESSARY TO
GUARANTEE INCERT CERTIFICATION
This chapter provides indications on the configuration parameters which,
if varied, could lower the safety level of the system, and the configurations
necessary to guarantee I&HAS certification.
For further details on programming and configuration, consult
the programming technical manual, which can be downloaded
from the website www.comelitgroup.com/
To guarantee Incert certification, ALL configurations required for Grade
2 certification (see "5.3 Configurations necessary to guarantee grade
2 certification according to EN50131-1" on page 81 on page 81)
must be observed, except for the settings listed in the following tables.
5.4.1 Code type
Indices
Parameters
1.1.1.22.x.45
Reset alarms L3
Configurations necessary to guarantee
INCERT certification
Selected
Deselected for manufacturer
5.4.2 System Parameters
Indices
Parameters
1.1.1.42.1.25
Forcing level 2 sabotage
Configurations necessary to guarantee
INCERT certification
Deselected
< BACK
STATUS/DESCRIPTION PANEL
STATUS
Drop-down menu, allows you to add, isolate and remove devices (Keypad, Safetouch...)/zones/outputs/expansions from the configuration.
The possible statuses for the device are as follows:
• Absent: when the device/zone/output/expansions do not exist or have to be removed.
• Active: when the device/zone/output is present, configured and intended to be operational.
• Isolated: when the device/zone/output/expansion is intended to be temporarily unused (even if present and configured, the control panel will
not consider it active).
ID
Device identification number. This corresponds to the bus address set on the device.
DESCRIPTION
Alphanumeric box, where you can enter a customised description of the device. For example, you might choose to change “Keypad 1” to “Entrance”
in order to rapidly identify the location of the peripheral within the system.
< BACK
PX KEY FUNCTIONS
This section of the program can be used to define the activation functions associated with the PX keys of the device.
There are two drop-down menus for each key. The first menu allows you to select only the Scenario / Activation option, whereas the second menu
allows you to choose from several standard configurations or from a series of custom activation scenarios (see "3.9 Scenarios" on page 42):
• Scenario P1: for the areas covered, activates all zones that have a check in the Partial 1 checkbox (if the default settings are maintained).
• Scenario P2: for the areas covered, activates all zones that have a check in the Partial 2 checkbox (if the default settings are maintained).
• Scenario P1+P2: for the areas covered, activates all zones that have a check in the Partial 1 or Partial 2 checkbox (if the default settings are
maintained).
• Scenario "n" with "n" from 4 to 16: all activations / deactivations defined in the selected scenario are executed.
• Total Activation: for the areas covered, activates all zones.
• Total Deactivation: for the areas covered, deactivates all zones.
< BACK
87
< BACK
< BACK
FUNCTION KEYS
The function keys can be used to perform actions on the system directly. This section of the program allows you to define the actions to be assigned
to each key.
There are two drop-down menus for each function key. The first allows you to decide the action category to assign to the function key, while the
second (activated when the category has been chosen from the first menu) allows you to choose the specific action.
The table below shows the possible associations for each category of actions, which is valid for all function keys.
FIRST MENU SECOND MENU
event category event generated by pressing a key
None
Scenario Activation
Alarm
Command
Activate Output
Deactivate Output
Toggle output
No action is possible for the function key
Allows you to assign to the function key one of the possible activation/deactivation programs:
• Scenario P1
• Scenario P2
• Scenario P1 + P2
• Scenario n (with n from 4 to 16)
• Total activation
• Total deactivation
Allows you to assign to the function key the generation of one of the alarms listed below:
• Burglar
• 24H
• Fire
• Panic
• Robbery
• Flooding
• Gas
• Medical
Allows you to assign to the function key one of the control panel commands listed below:
• Event 1 key: the device is capable of generating generic events that can be intercepted by an appropriately configured output. This configuration makes it
possible to generate an event defined as Press Event 1 Key when the function key is pressed, which the outputs are capable of understanding.
Also see the Outputs section and the Events Group section
• Event 2 key: as per Event 1 key, but for an event defined as Press Event 2 Key.
• Overtime: this command allows you to delay an automatic activation by n hours, where n is programmable, for the purpose of allowing work to continue beyond
the envisaged activation time.
• Stop alarms: stops the alarms in progress, regardless of whether the events that triggered them are still active. Does not stop silent alarms.
• Reset alarms: resets the switchboard conditions and alarms in progress, but not the events that triggered the alarms which, if still active, will trigger a new alarm
cycle. After this command, the switchboard assumes the same state as it would assume following an activation.
• Reset telephone calls: blocks all phone calls, on landline and GSM network. Also blocks any messages envisaged but not sent (SMS, email, MMS).
• Request assistance: allows you to send a request for assistance to one or more recipients, by means of a phone call. (not implemented).
• Authorise installer: authorises the installer code. Has the same effect as authorising the installer code from the keypad via the user menu.
Allows you to assign to the function key the activation of one of the outputs listed below:
• O. centr.unit 1 (control panel RY1 relay)
• O. centr.unit 2 (output TC1)
• O. centr.unit 3 (output TC2)
• ESP x O n (if expansion modules are present,
where x is the bus address of the expansion and n denotes the connection terminal of the output)
Allows you to assign the function key to deactivate the selected output. The possible choices are the same as indicated for the Activate Output function.
Allows you to assign the function key to toggle (change the status of) the selected output. The possible choices are the same as indicated for the Activate Output
function.
< BACK
BUZZER
• Enabled: enables the buzzer function and therefore all the options relating to the section.
• Entry: the buzzer will remain active for the entire duration of the entry time.
• Exit: the buzzer will remain active for the entire duration of the exit time.
• Alarm:the buzzer will remain active for the entire duration of the alarm time.
• Chime: the buzzer will signal the opening of a zone with an active Chime checkbox (Bell). The duration of the signal can be set in the
System Parameters section (see "3.14 System Parameters" on page 70).
• Pre-alarm: the buzzer will remain active for the entire pre-alarm time duration.
• Pre-alert: the buzzer will remain active for the entire duration of the automatic pre-alert activation time. The pre-alert time can be set in
the Areas section (see "3.6 Areas" on page 37).
• Key beep (only for Keypad and Safetouch): every time a key is pressed, a confirmation beep is generated.
• Failed activation*: for each area that is in failed activation status (after an activation), the device buzzer emits a tone lasting about 2
sec.
• Activation/Deactivation executed: the buzzer will indicate completion of the alarm activation/deactivation procedure. At the end of the
activation procedure (of all the areas of which a change of status is expected), the buzzer will emit
a continuous tone for 1 second. At the end of the deactivation procedure (of all the areas of which
deactivation is expected), the buzzer will emit a continuous tone for 2 seconds.
* the "failed activation" signal has priority over the activation/deactivation signals.
< BACK
88
< BACK
< BACK
SEND MESSAGE OPTIONS
When specific events occur, it is possible to send SMSs, emails, digital communications or notifications to the smartphone app. In this section, you
can assign an initial general permit to generate such events. From the Detailed Events section (see "3.12.5 Detailed events" on page 64) it is
possible to make a more precise configuration by selecting, for each category (e.g. Areas, Zones, Keypads, etc.), the events that can generate the
sending of messages.
• Send detailed events SMS: allows the control panel to send SMS for events generated by the device (only with GSM expansion module Art.
VEDOGSM installed and configured).
• Send Email messages: allows the control panel to send email messages for events generated by the device (only with GSM expansion module
Art. VEDOGSM or IP card Art. VEDOIP installed and configured).
• Send digital communication: allows the control panel to send digital communications for events generated by the device (only with PSTN line
configured or GSM expansion module Art. VEDOGSM installed and configured).
• Send notification to App: allows the control panel to send notifications to the smartphone App for events generated by the device (only with IP
card module Art. VEDOIP installed and configured).
• Send MMS (only for radio zone and zone): if selected, allows the control panel to send SMSs for events generated by the active Zone.
< BACK
SCENARIO CUSTOMISATION
MENU SELECTION
DESCRIPTION
None Activation of the scenario will have no effect on the area
Total Activation of the scenario will activate the area in Total mode
P1+P2 Activation of the scenario will activate only the sensors belonging to the area, with the attribute Partial 1 or Partial 2
P1 Activation of the scenario will activate only the sensors belonging to the area, with the attribute Partial 1
P2 Activation of the scenario will activate only the sensors belonging to the area, with the attribute Partial 2
Deactivation Activation of the scenario will deactivate the area in completely
Total with zero output delay Activation of the scenario will activate the area in Total mode. The output times will not be taken into consideration.
P1+P2 with zero output delay
Activation of the scenario will activate only the sensors belonging to the area, with the attribute Partial 1 or Partial 2. The output times will not be
taken into consideration.
P1 with zero output delay
Activation of the scenario will activate only the sensors belonging to the area, with the attribute Partial 1. The output times will not be taken into
consideration.
P2 with zero output delay
Activation of the scenario will activate only the sensors belonging to the area, with the attribute Partial 1. The output times will not be taken into
consideration.
< BACK
89
< BACK
< BACK
EVENT 1 / 2 / 3 / 4 /... / 16
The purpose of the outputs is to move on command, in a configurable manner, when one or more events occur. To explain the behaviour of the
outputs and of the control panel logic properly, it is useful to describe what is meant by the term 'event': at logic level, an event can be defined as the
condition that exists between the detection of a status and its cessation (or the cessation of its active status). By way of a simplified example, and
considered in terms of zone, the 'zone open' event starts when the zone opens and ends, normally, when it is closed again.
For each output, it is possible to associate up to 4 different events (Event 1, Event 2, Event 3, Event 4), each of which can be configured by means
of the parameters Event type, Event subtype, Event and Polarity.
Example: to make an output act as a burglar alarm output, for the purpose of controlling a siren, you need to make the following selections: in the
first drop-down menu, the event type “Areas”, in the second drop-down menu, select the event subtype “OR Alarm” (to have a signal that
includes multiple alarm sources), and in the third drop-down menu, select the event “General Alarm” or alternatively, “Alarm + sabotage”
Among the active outputs, there must be at least one output configured as: event: Areas; event subtype: Fault; event: Motion sensor jamming fault;
polarity: Direct; AND/OR: OR [Reg. 31]
• Event type: allows you to associate a main type of event to the output, e.g. an event belonging to the Area events type (see table on page 92).
• Event subtype: allows you to refine your choice by selecting a subtype of the category set as Event Type; going back to the Area events type
example, the subtype could be Zone Alarm (see table on page 92).
• Event: corresponds to the maximum detail and allows you to specify exactly which event will allow output activation (see table on page 92).
Going back to the example, the event could be Burglary, thereby making it possible to activate the output if a burglary is detected by an
activated area.
• Polarity: allows you to set the status in standby – consequently the status when activated - of the output.
• Direct: in standby the output is not active, and is controlled only during the active status. If the output controls the coil of a relay, in
standby the coil will not be powered up, and will be powered up only during the active status of the output.
• Inverse: opposite of direct. In standby the output is active, and unlike in the previous case, will not be controlled during the active
status. If the output controls the coil of a relay, in standby the coil will be powered up, and power to it will be switched off
during the active status of the output.
• AND/OR and selection box: only for certain types of event is an AND/OR selection block available which, together with a selection box, allows
you to organise and, if appropriate, determine the status of the output.
•
•
T
he OR condition is useful when you intend to group events originating from several sources in a single
output: in the case of an AREAS type of event, for example, it is possible to signal the activation status
of the first three areas on one output only, by selecting, for example, the checkboxes for the first three
areas: in this case, the output would activate if at least one of the three areas was activated, and would
be deactivated if all three areas were deactivated.
T
he AND condition is useful for providing summary information of the fact that a certain status is
common, for example, to two or more areas. A practical example, similar to the previous one, could
be a confirmation of activation of several areas, by selecting, for example, the checkboxes of the first
three areas: in this case, the output would activate only if all three areas were activated, and would be
deactivated if any one of the three areas were deactivated.
ometimes, instead of a selection block based on checkboxes like the one just described, a drop-down
S
menu will be displayed: in this case the AND or the OR condition will be constructed on the basis of the
options chosen from these menus.
< BACK
EVENTS ASSOCIATION (AND/OR)
• Events logic: for setting whether the control logic will be AND or OR type. In the case of AND logic, all the events have to be present
simultaneously to generate an activation of the output. For OR logic, the presence of just one of the configured events is sufficient
to generate an activation of the output. The output can be regulated by a timer. Standards CEI EN 50131-1 and EN50131-3 do
not allow timers to be associated with outputs used for signalling events such as Intrusion, Tamper or Robbery. If AND mode is
selected, the output will be enabled only during the timeframes permitted by the activation of the timer, provided that they are
prompted by the events envisaged in the configuration (see table on page 92). If OR mode is selected, the output will be active
when prompted by the events envisaged in the configuration (see table on page 92) and will also be active in the timeframes
determined by the timer, regardless of the presence or otherwise of other prompts. All active devices must have OR control logic
[Reg. 29]
• AND Timer: allows you to choose one of the timers available on the control panel and associate it to AND mode.
All active devices must NOT
• OR Timer: allows you to choose one of the timers available on the control panel and associate it to OR mode.
All active devices must NOT
have associated timers in AND [Reg. 27]
have associated timers in OR [Reg. 28]
< BACK
90
< BACK
< BACK
BEHAVIOUR
• Output type: can be used to select output conduct by associating with Monostable or Bistable type operation.
monostable. [Reg. 22]
All active outputs connected to a siren must be monostable [Reg. 51]
All radio sirens must be set as
• Monostable: this is the type of output dedicated to managing alarms correctly. It is an output to which a time setting is
assigned, and cycle repetitions if appropriate. On expiry of the time limit, the output returns to standby.
• Bistable: this is the type of output to use for signalling anomalies. Its main characteristic is that it follows the event to which
it has been associated. An anomaly output will remain active for the full duration of the anomaly, until it is rectified.
Only then will the output return to standby. If the event to which the output is associated consists of the OR of several
events, the output will remain activated until all the events included in the OR have returned to standby. Standard
CEI EN 50131 does not allow a bistable operating mode to be associated to outputs used for commanding sirens
or other alarm devices.
• Polarity (only for "NON radio" outputs): drop-down menu, for setting the output (with reference to its status in standby) as:
• direct polarity type NO (normally open)
• inverse polarity type NC (normally closed)
• Activation only with system activated: if selected, and if the output is of the monostable type, prevents an output being activated for alarm,
anomaly and sabotage events when the system is deactivated. If the radio output is of the siren type,
the flag will be selected automatically. Selected [Reg. 30]
• Oscillation semiperiod (only for "NON radio" outputs): numerical box in steps of 200ms, for setting the time of the oscillation semiperiod,
which can be set from 0 to a maximum of 1.4 seconds. Allows you to modulate
the status of the output, to allow it, for example, to control optical signalling devices
intermittently (e.g. LEDs that can flash).
• Confirmations oscillation period (only for radio outputs): for future uses.
• Alarm oscillation period (only for radio outputs): for future uses.
• Monostable times: the following controls are available only if the behaviour selected for the output is Monostable.
• ON time (seconds): allows you to establish the output activation time, in an operation cycle. Within this time,
the output can be stably controlled (if the oscillation period is set to zero) or oscillating with
modulation dependent upon the set oscillation period time. (only for "NON radio" outputs
is the ON timescale possible between minutes/seconds).
• OFF time (seconds): allows you to establish the output deactivation time, in an operation cycle.
• Repetition cycles: allows you to set how many repetitions of the ON Times + OFF Times cycle will be generated
within the output control cycle.
• Unlimited: if selected, there is no time limit on the output, so the only way to stop an alarm is with a device, for
example a keypad or an RFID key.
occurs
EVENT
ends
end of event if
associated with the
Monostable output
BISTABLE OUTPUT
active
in standby
Semiperiod
MONOSTABLE OUTPUT
active
in standby
ON Time
< BACK
91
1st Cycle
OFF
Time
2nd Cycle
< BACK
< BACK
The set of tables below (one for each available event type and applicable to each of the four available event sections) shows the possible choices.
EVENT TYPE: APP
EVENT SUBTYPE EVENT
App Events
• Wrong code
• Code accepted
• App locked
• Event 1 key
• Event 2 key
EVENT TYPE: AREAS
EVENT SUBTYPE EVENT
Zone alarm
•
•
•
•
Burglar
24H
Fire
Panic
•
•
•
•
Robbery
Flooding
Gas
Medical
General
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Inactivity
Not ready for activation
Login
Zone test
Zones Exclusion
Not ready
Not ready L2 forced
Not ready L3 forced
Chime
Event 1 key
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Event 2 key
User logged in
L2 forced ON
L3 forced ON
Negligence
Alarm log
Reset alarms
Stop Alarms
Stop telephone calls
Timed activation error
Fault
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Zone fault
Siren fault
Radio control fault
Bus power supply unit fuses fault
Bus power supply unit battery fault
Radio output battery fault
Bus siren battery fault
Bus mains power fault
Radio zone battery fault
Radio control battery fault
Voltage low - peripheral input from bus
Voltage low - peripheral output from bus
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Radio zones monitoring fault
Radio outputs monitoring fault
Output fault
Camera fault
No GSM/GPRS coverage
No telephone line
Failed communication fault
Robbery zone fault
Failed activation fault
IP Expansion fault on bus
Motion sensor jamming fault
8 I/O expansion fault
• Total activated
• P1 activated
• P2 activated
• Effective activation
• Deactivated
• P1 and P2 activated
OR alarm
•
•
•
•
Zone alarm
Zone alarm and zones sabotage
Sabotage
Zones sabotage
•
•
•
•
Bus expansion tamper
General alarm
Fault
Expansion bus
Sabotage
•
•
•
•
•
Zones sabotage
Siren sabotage
Radio device interference
App sabotage
8 I/O expansion sabotage
•
•
•
•
•
Keypad sabotage
RFID reader sabotage
Safetouch sabotage
Touch device sabotage
Power supply unit / isolator sabotage
Activation times
•
•
•
•
Input and output time
Output time
Last output time
Input 1 time
• Input 2 time
• Pre-alarm time
• Pre-alert time
Activation/Deactivation
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Keypad fault
RFID reader fault
Safetouch fault
Touch device fault
Power supply unit / isolator fault
Radio concentrator fault
Siren bus fault
Alarm communication device fault
Expansion on IP fault
IP video expansion fault
•
•
•
•
•
Radio concentrator sabotage
Siren from bus sabotage
Communicator device sabotage
Expansion on IP sabotage
IP video expansion sabotage
EVENT TYPE: BRIDGE
EVENT SUBTYPE EVENT
Bridge events
• Wrong code
• Code accepted
• Bridge locked
• Event 1 key
• Event 2 key
EVENT TYPE: REMOTE CONTROL
EVENT SUBTYPE EVENT
Remote management
events
• Key error
• User recognised
• Lock web
• Lock PC
• Lock SMS
• Lock voice
• Home autom. lock
EVENT TYPE: TOUCH DEVICE
EVENT SUBTYPE EVENT
Touch device events
• False key
• Valid key
• Lock keypad
• Event 1 key pressed
• Event 2 key pressed
EVENT TYPE: GROUPS
EVENT SUBTYPE EVENT
AND / OR
for this event type only an AND / OR choice is made available, along with a menu from which to choose the eight configurable groups of events made available by
the control panel.
If you set AND, all the events in the group will have to occur for the output activation condition to be met.
If you set OR, only one event in the group need occur to meet the condition of activation of the event.
EVENT TYPE: RFID READER
EVENT SUBTYPE EVENT
RFID reader events
92
• False key
• Key not recognised
• Lock reader
< BACK
< BACK
EVENT TYPE: RADIO CONTROL
EVENT SUBTYPE EVENT
Radio control events
• Event 1 key pressed
• Event 2 key pressed
EVENT TYPE: SAFETOUCH
EVENT SUBTYPE EVENT
Safetouch events
• False key
• Valid key
• Lock keypad
• Event 1 key pressed
• Event 2 key pressed
EVENT TYPE: SCAN
EVENT SUBTYPE EVENT
• Burglar
• 24H
• Fire
• Panic
• Robbery
• Flooding
• Gas
• Medical
General
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Inactivity
Not ready for activation
Login
Zone test
Zones Exclusion
Not ready
Not ready L2 forced
Not ready L3 forced
Chime
Event 1 key
Event 2 key
User logged in
L2 forced ON
L3 forced ON
Negligence
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Alarm log
Reset alarms
Stop Alarms
Stop telephone calls
Timed activation error
Technical programming
Control panel in service
Reset system alarms
Stop system alarms
Stop system telephone calls
Change date/time
Change site data
Test battery
Voice call failed
Outgoing phone communication
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Digital communicator periodic test
Digital communicator manual test
SMS sent
EMAIL sent
MMS sent
Incoming phone communication
Activation lock cause
Voice call made
Digital communication failed
Digital communication sent
Communicator parameters changed
Updating firmware
Send email failed
Fault
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Zone fault
Siren fuses from bus fault
Radio control fault
Bus power supply unit fuses fault
Bus power supply unit battery fault
Radio output battery fault
Bus siren battery fault
Bus mains power fault
Radio zone battery fault
Radio control battery fault
Voltage low - peripheral input from bus
Voltage low - peripheral output from bus
Radio zones monitoring fault
Radio sirens monitoring fault
Output fault
Camera fault
No GSM/GPRS coverage
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
No telephone line
Failed communication fault
Robbery zone fault
Failed activation fault
IP Expansion fault on bus
Motion sensor jamming fault
8 I/O expansion fault
Keypad fault
RFID reader fault
Safetouch fault
Touch device fault
Power supply unit / isolator fault
Radio concentrator fault
Siren fault
Communicator device fault
Expansion on IP fault
IP video expansion fault
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Control panel battery fault
Control panel power supply network fault
PSTN fault
GSM expansion fault
IP expansion fault
Audio expansion fault
Speak/listen expansion fault
Domotics expansion fault
Control panel aux line fuses fault
Control panel bus line fuses fault
Control panel siren line fuses fault
Control panel voltage low
Control panel bus fault
Telephone line fault
GSM network fault
GPRS network fault
Date lost
Zone alarm
• Total activated
• P1 activated
• P2 activated
• Effective activation
OR alarm
•
•
•
•
Zone alarm
Zone alarm and zones sabotage
Sabotage
Zones sabotage
•
•
•
•
Bus expansion tamper
General alarm
Fault
Expansion bus
Sabotage
•
•
•
•
•
•
Zones sabotage
Siren sabotage
Radio device interference
App sabotage
8 I/O expansion sabotage
Keypad sabotage
•
•
•
•
•
•
RFID reader sabotage
Safetouch sabotage
Touch device sabotage
Power supply unit / isolator sabotage
Radio concentrator sabotage
Siren from bus sabotage
Activation times
•
•
•
•
Input and output time
Output time
Last output time
Input 1 time
• Input 2 time
• Pre-alarm time
• Pre-alert time
Activation/Deactivation
• Deactivated
• P1 and P2 activated
•
•
•
•
•
•
Communicator device sabotage
Expansion on IP sabotage
IP video expansion sabotage
Remote connections sabotage
GSM module jamming
False code
EVENT TYPE: KEYPAD
EVENT SUBTYPE EVENT
Keypad events
• False key
• Valid key
• Lock keypad
• Event 1 key pressed
• Event 2 key pressed
• Sabotage
• Status
• Zone activated
• Chime
• Excluded*
EVENT TYPE: TIMER
EVENT SUBTYPE EVENT
Timer events
• Timer ON
EVENT TYPE: OUTPUT
EVENT SUBTYPE EVENT
Output events
• Output ON
EVENT TYPE: USER
EVENT SUBTYPE EVENT
User events
• User recognised
• Extraordinary request
EVENT TYPE: ZONE
EVENT SUBTYPE EVENT
Zone events
• Zone follows
• Zone alarm
• Fault/anomaly
< BACK* The excluded zone event that can be linked with an output and/or a group of events is activated in the case of Exclusion, Isolation or Restriction of a zone
93
< BACK
< BACK
ZONE TYPE / SUBTYPE
elects the type of zone from four possibilities: Alarm, Command, Sabotage, Fault Once you have made your selection, the field below (subtype)
S
will show a series of possible choices, depending on the type of selection made.
ZONE TYPE: ALARMS
SUBTYPE
EVENTS GENERATED
• Burglar
• 24H
• Zone alarm
• System/area alarm, zone alarm, 24H
• OR Area/System alarm: zone alarm, zone alarm + zone sabotage, general alarm
• Fire
• Panic
• If silent: Zone alarm, panic area/system alarm. Does not generate OR type alarms
• If not silent, acts as 24H
• Robbery
Zone alarm, robbery area/system alarm. Does not generate OR type alarms
• Flooding
• Gas
• Medical
Zone alarm, medical emergency area/system alarm. Does not generate OR type alarms
ZONE TYPE: COMMAND
SUBTYPE
•
•
•
•
Burglar
24H
Fire
Panic
•
•
•
•
Robbery
Flooding
Gas
Medical
•
•
•
•
•
Keypad sabotage
RFID reader sabotage
Safetouch sabotage
Touch device sabotage
Power supply unit / isolator sabotage
•
•
•
•
•
Radio concentrator sabotage
Siren from bus sabotage
Communicator device sabotage
Expansion on IP sabotage
IP video expansion sabotage
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Radio zones monitoring fault
Radio outputs monitoring fault
Output fault
Camera fault
No GSM/GPRS coverage
No telephone line
Failed communication fault
Robbery zone fault
Failed activation fault
IP Expansion fault from bus
Motion sensor jamming fault
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
8IO expansion fault
Keypad fault
RFID fault
Safetouch fault
Touch device fault
Power supply unit / isolator fault
Radio concentrator fault from bus
Siren bus fault
Alarm communication device fault
Expansion on IP fault
Video expansion on IP fault
ZONE TYPE: SABOTAGE
SUBTYPE
•
•
•
•
•
Zones sabotage
Siren sabotage
Radio device interference
App sabotage
8I/O expansion sabotage
ZONE TYPE: FAULT
SUBTYPE
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Zone fault
Siren fault
Radio control fault
Bus power supply unit fuses fault
Bus power supply unit battery fault
Radio output battery fault
Bus siren battery fault
Bus mains power fault
Radio zone battery fault
Radio control battery fault
Voltage low - peripheral input from bus
Voltage low - peripheral output from bus
< BACK
94
< BACK
< BACK
REACTION TYPE
This section is enabled only for Burglary type zones. For all other types of zone, this zone is made inaccessible. The reaction of a zone, in the event
of violation, derives from the fact that the following conditions must be met:
√√ must not be under testing
√√ must not be excluded
√√ the areas on which it depends for operation must be activated (only for burglary zones)
√√ must not have reached the maximum number of alarm cycles if a limited number of cycles has been set.
• Instant: if this option is selected, when the zone is violated, not excluded, not in test and the areas to which it belongs are Activated, it
immediately generates the events (specified using the Alarm type menu): Zone alarm, Area alarm. The testing and instant burglar
zones do not generate failed activation faults and do not end the output times.
• Delayed input 1: if this option is selected, when the zone is violated, not excluded, not in test and the areas to which it belongs are Activated,
it starts the longer Input time 1 for the Activated Areas to which it belongs. During the input time, the enabled keypads will
emit an alert sound. If at the end of Input time 1 the areas to which the zone belongs have still not been deactivated, or the
zone is violated when Input time 1 has elapsed, the events are generated (as for an Instant type zone). Suggestion: if the
layout necessitates walking through the protected spaces to deactivate the alarm system areas, the first zone to be
violated should be of Delayed input type.
• Delayed input 2: as above, but with reference to area timer Input 2.
• Input path: If this option is selected, when the zone is violated, not excluded, not in test, the areas to which it belongs are Activated and there is
no input time in progress, it generates an alarm. During the input time, the enabled keypads will emit an alert sound. If at the end of
Input time the areas to which the zone belongs have still not been deactivated, or the zone is violated when Input time has elapsed,
the events are generated (as for an Instant type zone). The violation of an Input path zone during the Input time for its Area does not
generate any event. Suggestion: the zones to be passed through to reach the point at which it is possible to deactivate the
areas to which the zones belong should be configured as an input path.
• Delayed in output: if this option is selected, violation of the zone during an Output time does not cause any event to be generated. If the zone is
violated in the absence of an Output time, it behaves as zone programming, reaction type: Instant or Delayed. Suggestion:
the zones that need to be passed through after activation to exit the premises protected by the control panel
should be configured as Delayed in output.
• Last output: During the Output time, the enabled control devices will beep. If the zone is violated and the output time is not yet ended, the Last
Output Time Timer replaces the value remaining for the Area Output Time. If the zone is violated when the Output time has elapsed
and the Areas to which the zone belongs are Activated, it behaves like zone programming, reaction type: Instant or Delayed.
Suggestion: the last zone that needs to be passed through after activation to exit the premises protected by the control
panel should be configured as last output.
< BACK
95
< BACK
< BACK
ATTRIBUTES
• Excluded: the zone with this attribute will be excluded, it will not generate the Zone alarm event. Anomaly and sabotage conditions will be indicated.
• Cannot Exclude: the zones with this attribute cannot be forced if they are not ready for activation during the system activation process (alarm,
sabotage, fault).
• Chime: the zone with this attribute, generates a chime event if the area to which it belongs is Deactivated. The enabled control devices will beep,
otherwise (Area Activated) it will behave as specified via the Reaction type parameter.
• Test: the zone with this attribute, is operational with all effects, however it does not cause the alarm event but records the event in the EVENTS
LOG. This attribute allows monitoring of a zone without causing alarm signals. The testing and instant burglar zones do not generate failed
activation faults and do not end the output times.
• Auto excludable: the zone with this attribute will be excluded automatically if violated during activation of the Area to which it belongs. The next time
the Area to which the zone belongs is deactivated, the zone will be activated automatically. The Auto-excludable attribute also
affects zones with Reaction type: Output Time. The zone will be automatically excluded when Output Time for the area to which
it belongs has elapsed. NOT selected [Reg. 38]
• Auto excludable with reset: the zone with this attribute will be excluded automatically if violated during activation of the Area to which it belongs. The
zone will be activated automatically when it reverts to standby, behaving as specified via the Reaction type parameter.
The Auto-excludable attribute also affects zones with Reaction type: Output Time. The zone will be automatically
excluded when Output Time for the area to which it belongs has elapsed. NOT selected [Reg. 39]
• Output delay with termination: the zone with this attribute, if violated during Output Time for the area to which it belongs, causes the area Output
Time to be terminated, when the area reverts to standby and is ready for activation.
• Partial 1: the zone with this attribute is activated if the areas to which it belongs are activated in Partial 1, Partial 1+2 and in Total.
• Partial
the zone with this attribute is activated if the areas to which it belongs are activated in Partial 2, Partial 1+2 and in Total.
2:
• Delayed on partial activation
Enable output delay on partial activation: if this option is selected, the zone will be activated following the output delay also for partial
activations (P1, P2, P1+P2).
• Delayed and assess ready activation: if this option is selected, if the zone is violated at the moment of activation, forced activation of the system
will be requested. In this condition the system will be forced and the zone will be active and will behave as
specified via the Reaction type parameter.
• Display during input/output: if this option is selected, the open zone will be displayed also during the input/output time.
• Alarm verified: if selected and it is a burglary type zone, the verified alarm is generated immediately without having confirmation from another zone.
< BACK
COMMAND TYPE
This section is for setting the type of command (or commands) that can be generated by the zone.
• Pulse Act/Deact: if selected, violation of the zone inverts the activation or deactivation status of the areas to which it is associated. The return
of the zone to standby status will have no effect.
• Bistable Act/Deact: if selected, violation of the zone activates the areas to which it is associated. The return to standby status deactivates them.
• Activation only: if selected, violation of the zone activates the areas to which it is associated. The return of the zone to standby status will have
no effect.
• Deactivation only: if selected, violation of the zone deactivates the areas to which it is associated. The return of the zone to standby status will
have no effect.
• Reset Area: if selected, violation of the zone resets the areas associated with the zone to activation conditions.
• Reset system: if selected, violation of the zone resets the system alarms.
• Cancel telephone calls: if selected, violation of the zone blocks all outgoing phone calls.
• Extended not ready for activation: if selected, violation of the zone prevents activation of the associated areas.
• Extended ready for activation: if selected, violation of the zone permits activation of the associated areas.
< BACK
96
< BACK
< BACK
TAB FOR SELECTING DETAILS OF EVENTS TO SIGNAL
The group of tables below provides a list of the events associated with each tab:
ZONES EVENTS MANAGED
• Command
• Zone exclusion
• Zone isolation
• zone restriction
Areas/System EVENTS MANAGED
• Total activation
• Partial activation 1
• Partial activation 2
• Effective activation
• Deactivation
• Partial activation 1 and 2
Zones alarm tab
•
•
•
•
Burglar
24H
Fire
Panic
•
•
•
•
Robbery
Flooding
Gas
Medical
Sabotage Tab
•
•
•
•
•
•
Zones sabotage
Sirens sabotage
Radio concentrator jamming
App sabotage
8 In Out expansion sabotage
Keypad sabotage
•
•
•
•
•
•
RFID sabotage
Safetouch sabotage
Touch device sabotage
Power supply units and isolators sabotage
Radio concentrator sabotage
Siren from bus sabotage
•
•
•
•
•
•
Telephone devices sabotage
IP expansion sabotage
IP device (camera) sabotage
Remote communications sabotage
GSM module jamming
Code not valid
Faults Tab
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Zone fault
Siren fault
Radio control fault
Bus power supply fuses fault
Bus power supply battery
Radio output battery
Siren battery
Bus power supply network
Radio zone battery
Radio control battery
Input voltage level to peripheral from bus low
Output voltage level from peripheral from bus low
Radio zones monitoring
Radio sirens monitoring
Output fault
Camera fault
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
No GSM/GPRS coverage
No telephone line
Failed communication fault
Robbery zone fault
Failed activation fault
IP Expansion fault from bus
Motion sensor jamming
8 In Out expansion fault
Keypad fault
RFID fault
Safetouch fault
Touch device fault
Power supply units or isolators fault
Radio concentrator fault from bus
Siren fault from bus
Telephone devices fault
IP expansion fault
IP device (camera) fault
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Control panel battery anomaly
Control panel power supply network anomaly
PSTN fault
GSM fault
IP card fault
Audio card fault
Intercom card fault
Domotics fault
Control panel aux line fuses fault
Control panel bus line fuse fault
Control panel siren line fuses fault
Control panel voltage low
Control panel bus fault
Telephone line fault
GSM network anomaly
GPRS network anomaly
Date lost
Generic tabs
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Inactivity
Not ready for activation
User logged
L2 forced ON
L3 forced ON
Negligence
Alarm log
Reset alarms
Stop alarms
Stop telephone calls
Timed activation error
System alarm memory
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Technical programming
Control panel in service
Reset system alarms
Stop system telephone calls
Change date time
Change site data
Automatic system reset
Voice call failed
Outgoing phone communication
Digital communicator periodic event
Digital communicator manual test
SMS sent
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
EMAIL sent
MMS sent
Incoming phone communication
Activation lock cause
Voice call made
Digital communication failed
Digital communication sent
Communicator parameters changed
Updating firmware
Send email failed
Activations Tab
KEYPAD EVENTS MANAGED
• Wrong code
• Code accepted
• Lock keypad
• Event 1 key
• Event 2 key
RFID EVENTS MANAGED
• Key not valid
• Key accepted
• Lock RFID reader
REMOTE EVENTS MANAGED
CONNECTIONS
•
•
•
•
Wrong Login
Logged in
Lock web
Lock PC
• Lock SMS commands
• Lock Voice Menu
• Home autom. lock
TIMER EVENTS MANAGED
• Timer On Off
OUTPUTS EVENTS MANAGED
• Activate mono-stable output
• Activate output manually
97
< BACK
< BACK
ACTIONS EVENTS MANAGED
Activations Tab
Alarms tab
Commands tab
Outputs tab
Zones tab
• Activation Deactivation action
• Burglar alarm action
• 24H alarm action
• Fire alarm action
• Panic alarm action
• Robbery alarm action
• Flood alarm action
• Gas alarm action
• Medical Emergency alarm action
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Event 1 key command
Event 2 key command
Extraordinary command
Stop Alarms command
Reset alarms command
Reset Telephone Calls command
Reset Control panel command
Request support
Request installer authorisation
Request code
Request key
Request login upgrade
Request manufacturer authorisation
• Output activation action
• Output deactivation action
• Output toggle action
• Zone exclusion action
• Zone inclusion action
• Zone isolation action
• Zone activation action
SAFETOUCH EVENTS MANAGED
• Wrong code
• Code accepted
• Lock Safetouch
• Event 1 key
• Event 2 key
TOUCH/APP/ EVENTS MANAGED
BRIDGE DEVICES
• Wrong code
• Code accepted
• Lock Safetouch / Planux / App / Bridge
• Event 1 key
• Event 2 key
CHANGE CODES EVENTS MANAGED
• Code added
• Code removed
• Code changed
• Key added
• Key removed
• Key changed
RESET EVENTS MANAGED
DATABASE
• Reset database
< BACK
PANEL FOR PERIODS/CALENDAR MANAGEMENT SECTION
This is the section for setting periods of activity, their duration and their association to a specific timer. You can set up to thirty different periods/
calendars, although the figure shows a smaller number for the sake of convenience.
ID
Start date
Start month
Start year
Start day
End date
End month
End year
End day
Timer type
1
2
3
4
25
December
2012
*
6
January
2013
*
Activation
Activation type
Holiday
5
ID
Numerical box; uniquely identifies the specific timer.
ENABLE
Checkbox; when selected, enables operation of the selected timer.
START DATE / START MONTH / START YEAR / START DAY OF WEEK / END DATE / END MONTH / END YEAR / END DAY OF WEEK
Drop-down menu for selecting the start/end month of the interval.
If it is not important or not convenient to assign a date, month and/or year, select asterisk (*) from the menu.
TIMER TYPE (SELECTION)
Drop-down menu for selecting the type of timer that will be active during the interval, from those available in the drop-down menu. You can choose
any one of the eight timer types configured. Also see Description (timer type).
ACTIVATION TYPE
Drop-down menu, select the operating mode assigned to the timer. You can choose any one of the eight types of timer activation configured.
CAUTION: If the month is specified, it is also necessary to specify the day. If the year is specified, it is necessary to specify both the month
and the day.
CAUTION: Priority of periods/calendar timers: In the event of conflict between two or more timers, the least used timer will take priority over the
others and therefore be used. For example, imagine that you have two timers in conflict, one of which is active every day and the other of
which is active only one day a week. The timer that is active only one day a week will take priority because it is the less used of the two.
< BACK
98
< BACK
< BACK
99
< BACK
2nd edition 02/2017
code 2G40001438
CERTIFIED MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS
w w w.comelitgroup.com
Via Don Arrigoni, 5 - 24020 Rovetta (BG) - Italy
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement